530440

Skoda Fabia Handleiding

220
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/236
Pagina verder
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaFabia
OWNER´ S MANUAL
How you can contribute to a cleaner environment
The fuel consumption of your Škoda - and thus the level of
pollutants contained in the exhaust - is also determined by how
you drive.
The noise level and wear and tear are also influenced by how
you personally handle your vehicle. This Owner ´s Manual tells
you how to drive your Škoda to achieve the minimum impact
on the environment, and how to save money at the same time.
Look up „Environment“ in the Index to find out more.
Please also refer to all the texts identified with a ❀
in this
Owner ´s Manual.
Make your contribution - for the sake of the
environment.
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Fabia anglicky 05.07
S54.5610.09.20
6Y0 012 003 LR
02_07.indd 102_07.indd 1 12.2.2007 9:50:4212.2.2007 9:50:42
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaService
ŠkodaGenuine Parts
ŠkodaGenuine Accessories
02_07.indd 202_07.indd 2 12.2.2007 9:51:1912.2.2007 9:51:19
Introduction
You have opted for a Škoda - our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
Your new Škoda offers you a vehicle featuring the most modern engineering and a wide range of equipment which
you will undoubtedly wish to use to the full during your daily motoring. That is why, we recommend that you read
this Owner's Manual attentively to enable you to become familiar with your car and all that it offers as quickly as
possible.
Please do not hesitate to contact your Škoda Service Partner or importer should you have any further questions
regarding any problems which may arise or your vehicle. He will be ready at any time to receive your questions,
suggestions and criticisms.
Any national legal provisions which vary from the information contained in this Owner's Manual take precedence
over the information contained herein.
We wish you much pleasure with your Škoda and pleasant motoring at all times.
Your Škoda Auto
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
1
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Introduction2
On-board literature
The on-board literature for your vehicle consists of this “Owner's
Manual” as well as the brochures “Quick Reference Guide”, “Service
Schedule” and “Help on the road”. There can also be a variety of other
additional operating manuals and instructions on-board (e.g. an oper-
ating manual for the radio) depending on the vehicle model and equip-
ment.
If one of the publications listed above is missing, please contact a Škoda
Service Partner immediately, where one will be glad to assist you in such
matters.
One should note that the details given in the vehicle's papers always
take precedence over those in the Owner's Manual.
Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes the current scope of equipment.
Certain items of equipment listed are only installed later on and only
envisaged for particular markets. The illustrations can differ in minor
details from your vehicle; they are only intended for general information.
In addition to information regarding all the controls and equipment, the
Owner's Manual also contains important information regarding care and
operation for your safety and also to retain the value of your vehicle. To
provide you with valuable tips and aids. You can learn how how you can
operate your vehicle safely, economically and in an environmentally
conscious way.
For safety reasons, please also pay attention to the information on
accessories, modifications and replacement of parts ⇒ page 171.
The other chapters of the Owner's Manual are also important, however,
for proper treatment of your car - in addition to regular care and mainte-
nance - helps to retain its value and in many cases is also one of the
conditions for possible warranty claims.
The Brief instruction
includes an overview of the most important controls of your vehicle.
The Service schedule
contains:
• Vehicle data,
• Service intervals,
• Overview of the service work,
• Service proof,
• Confirmation of mobility warranty,
• important information on the warranty.
The confirmations of the carried out service work are one of the condi-
tions for possible warranty claims.
Please always present the Service schedule when you take your car to a
Škoda Service Partner.
If the Service schedule is missing or worn, please contact your Škoda
Service Partner, where your car is serviced regularly. You will receive a
duplicate, in which the previously carried out service work are confirmed.
Help on the road
contains the addresses and telephone numbers of Škoda Importers.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
2
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Contents 3
Contents
Layout of this Owner's Manual
(explanations)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights . . .
General view of the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . .
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer with counter for distance driven . .
Service Interval Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-functional indicator* (onboard computer)
Information display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Middle rear head restraint* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating the front seats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Net partition (Estate)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The roof luggage rack system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drinks can holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear cup holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter* and power socket* . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . . . .
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting-off and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting steering wheel position* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-speed automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal telephone connection* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems . . . . .
CD changer* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The physical principle of a frontal collision . . . . .
Important safety information regarding the use of
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are seat belts correctly fastened? . . . . . . . . .
Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What you should know about transporting
children! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX”* system
6
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
12
13
16
18
20
29
29
31
31
32
36
38
38
40
43
43
46
48
49
51
53
53
54
55
56
56
58
58
62
64
66
66
67
67
67
68
69
74
74
76
81
81
82
82
84
84
85
86
86
89
89
94
94
94
95
99
99
99
100
103
103
104
104
105
108
109
109
111
113
114
117
117
120
123
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
3
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Contents4
Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic stability programme (ESP)* . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock brake system (ABS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The first 1 500 kilometres and then afterwards . .
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in an economical and environmentally
conscious manner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detachable towing device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the exterior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the interior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspecting and Replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts
Accessories and replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid box* and Warning triangle* . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire extinguisher* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spray for repairing a tyre* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare wheel*Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow-starting and towing vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel consumption according to the regulations EU2,
EU3, EU4 (99/100/EU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
125
125
128
128
129
129
130
131
131
132
132
135
136
137
138
138
140
141
141
141
141
146
148
148
148
149
151
151
154
156
159
160
164
165
165
171
171
171
173
173
173
173
174
174
175
175
175
180
182
185
185
189
197
197
197
197
197
197
197
198
199
200
223
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
4
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Contents 5
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
5
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)6
Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)
The Owner's Manual has been systematically designed, in order to make it easy for
you to find and absorb the information you require.
Chapters, table of contents and subject index
The text of the manual are divided into relatively short sections which are combined
into easy-to-read chapters. The chapter you are reading at any particular moment
is highlighted at the bottom right of the page.
The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed
Subject index at the end of the Owner's Manual helps you to rapidly find the infor-
mation you are looking for.
Sections
The majority of Sections apply to all models.
Since there is a wide range of different equipment and options available it is clearly
unavoidable, despite dividing the contents into sections, that mention may be
made of equipment which is not fitted to your vehicle.
Equipment which is marked * is only standard on certain vehicle model versions or
only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
Brief information and instructions
Each section has a Heading.
This is followed by Brief information (in large italic lettering), which tells you the
subject which is dealt with in this section.
Most of the illustrations are accompanied by an Instruction (in relatively large
letters) which explains to you in a straightforward way the action you have to take.
Work steps which have to be carried out are illustrated with a hyphen.
Notes
All four kinds of notes, which are used in the text, are always stated at the end of the
respective section.
WARNING
The most important notes are marked with the heading Warning. These
Warning notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury.
While reading the text you will frequently encounter a double arrow
followed by a small warning symbol. This symbol is intended to draw your
attention to a Warning note at the end of the section to which you must pay
careful attention.
Caution
A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle
(e.g. damage to gearbox), or points out general risks of an accident.
For the sake of the environment
An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects.
This is where you will, for example, find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consump-
tion.
Note
A normal Note draws your attention in a general way to important information.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the direction
of travel of the vehicle.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
6
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Cockpit 7
Using the system
Fig. 1 Certain items of equipment shown in the illustration are only fitted to particular model versions or are optional items of equipment.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
7
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Cockpit8
Cockpit
General view
This general view is designed to help you to quickly become familiar
with the instruments, gauges and controls.
Electric exterior mirror adjustment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
− Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight flasher
− Speed regulating system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster: Instruments and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
− Multi-functional indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for heating on the driver's seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Switch for the ESP* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Switch for the TCS* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag* . .
Control dial for heating on the front passenger seat* . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for the front seat passenger airbag(s)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for:
− Central locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Electric power-operated window* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light switch, control dial for the instrument lighting and control dial
for the headlight beam range regulatiion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for adjusting the steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight flasher, driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Operating controls for the heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Operating controls for the air conditioning system* . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Selector lever (automatic gearbox*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio*
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note
• Equipment which is marked * is only standard on certain vehicle model
versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
• Vehicles with factory-fitted radio, mobile phone, navigation system, CD player
etc. are supplied with separate instructions for operating such equipment.
• The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items
on right-hand drive models may differ from that shown in ⇒ page 7, fig. 1. The
symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left-hand drive models.
A
1
51
A
2
76
A
3
45
86
A
4
9
A
5
13
49
A
6
76
A
7
56
A
8
48
A
9
125
126
A
10
45
A
11
115
A
12
56
A
13
111
A
14
115
A
15
34
38
A
16
43, 44
A
17
151
A
18
69
A
19
81
A
20
111
A
21
82
A
22
74
76
A
23
67
A
24
84
90
A
25
A
26
69
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
8
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 9
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights
General view of the instrument cluster
Fig. 2 Instrument cluster
Engine revolutions counter ⇒ page 10
Coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 10
Fuel gauge ⇒ page 10
Speedometer
− with counter for distance driven ⇒ page 11
− with trip counter for distance driven ⇒ page 11
− with Service Interval Display ⇒ page 11
Digital clock ⇒ page 12 and multi-functional indicator* ⇒ page 13
Information display* ⇒ page 16
When the lights are switched on, the instrument cluster is illuminated.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
9
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights10
Engine revolutions counter
The start of the red zone in the revolutions counter ⇒ page 9, fig. 2 indicates the
maximum permissible engine speed for all gears for an engine which has been run
in and operating at a normal temperature. You should shift into the next higher gear
before this red zone is reached, or move the selector lever into position D if your
car is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
One should shift to the next lower gear at the latest when the engine is no longer
running “smoothly”.
Avoid high engine speeds during the running-in period ⇒ page 131.
Caution
The needle of the revolutions counter must on no account move into the red zone
of the scale - risk of engine damage!
For the sake of the environment
Shifting up early helps you save fuel and reduce the operating noise of your
vehicle.
Coolant temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 9, fig. 2 operates only when the ignition
is switched on.
In order to avoid any damage to the engine, please pay attention to the following
notes regarding the temperature ranges:
Cold range
If the pointer is in the left-hand area of the scale it means that the engine has not
yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid running at high engine speeds, at full
throttle and at severe engine loads.
The operating range
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves
into the mid-range of the scale. The pointer may also move further to the right at
high engine loads and high outside temperatures. This is not critical provided the
warning symbol in the instrument cluster does not flash.
If the symbol in the instrument cluster flashes it means that either the coolant
temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Please refer to the guide-
lines ⇒ page 23, “Coolant temperature/coolant level ”.
WARNING
Pay attention to the warning notes ⇒ page 152, “Working in the engine
compartment” before opening the bonnet and inspecting the coolant level.
Caution
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant. There is then a risk of the engine over-
heating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads!
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge ⇒ page 9, fig. 2 only operates when the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 45 litres. The warning symbol in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve marking. There are now
about 7 litres of fuel remaining in the tank. This symbol is a reminder for you, that
you must refuel.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
PLEASE REFUEL
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
A
1
A
2
A
3
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
10
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 11
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Caution
Never run the fuel tank completely empty! An irregular fuel supply can result in
poor ignition or misfiring. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and
damage the catalytic converter.
Speedometer with counter for distance driven
The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilometres (km).
On certain model versions, the readout is shown in “miles”.
Bottom counter (trip counter) for distance driven
The bottom counter indicates the distance which you have driven since this
counter was last reset - in steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile. It can be reset to
zero by pressing the reset button next to the trip counter ⇒ fig. 3.
Top counter for distance driven
The top counter for distance driven indicates the total distance in kilometres or
miles which the vehicle has been driven.
Fault display
dEF will appear as a constant text in the display field of the counter for distance
driven if there is a fault in the instrument cluster. Have the fault rectified as soon as
possible by a specialist workshop.
Warning against excessive speeds*
An acoustic warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 kilome-
tres per hour. The acoustic warning signal will switch off again when the vehicle
speed goes below this speed limit.
This function is only valid for some countries.
WARNING
Never seek to adjust the trip counter for distance driven while driving for
safety reasons!
Service Interval Display
Fig. 3 Instrument
cluster: Counter for
distance driven
Fig. 4 Service Interval
Display: Reset button
Fig. 5 Service Interval
Display
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
11
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights12
Service Interval Display
A key symbol ⇒ page 11, fig. 5 appears in the counter display for distance driven
about 30 days before reaching the due date for the service. The remaining distance
to be driven will be indicated for 10 seconds next to the key symbol and then the
remaining number of days to the due date for the service inspection.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
SERVICE DUE IN ... KM OR ... DAYS
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km. or days
until the service due date is reached.
The text INSP appears as a flashing key symbol and as soon as the due date for the
service is reached.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
SERVICE NOW
The display disappears within 20 seconds after switching on the ignition. The trip
counter is also displayed after pressing the reset button of the trip counter for
distance driven (for more than 1 second).
Resetting Service Interval Display
We recommend having this resetting performed by a specialist garage.
The specialist garage:
• resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection,
• makes an entry in the Service schedule,
• affix the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of the
dash panel on the driver's side.
It is also possible for you to reset the Service Interval Display with the reset button
⇒ page 11, fig. 4 as follows:
• Press the reset button ⇒ page 11, fig. 4 with the ignition switched off and
and hold it down.
• Switch the ignition on, release the reset button and and turn the reset button
to the right. All counters will be reset to 0.
It is only possible to reset the Service Interval Display, if a service message or at least
a pre-warning is shown on the display of the instrument cluster.
Caution
We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself other-
wise this can result in the service interval display being incorrectly set, which may
also result in problems with operation of your vehicle.
Note
• Never reset the display between service intervals otherwise this may result in
incorrect readouts.
• information is retained in the Service Interval Display also after the battery of
the vehicle is disconnected.
• it is necessary to re-code the Service Interval Display if a new instrument cluster
is installed during repair work. This work is carried out by a specialist garage.
• Please refer to the brochure Service schedule for extensive information about
the service intervals.
Digital clock
A reset button is installed on the left below beside the speedometer for
adjusting the clock ⇒ page 9, fig. 2.
Set hours
– Turn the reset button to the left.
Setting minutes
– Turn the reset button to the right.
A
A
A
A
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
12
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 13
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
The clock should not be adjusted while driving for safety reasons but only
when the vehicle is stationary.
Multi-functional indicator* (onboard computer)
Introduction
The multi-functional indicator appears in the display of the revolutions counter
⇒ fig. 6 or in the information display ⇒ page 16, fig. 9 depending on the equip-
ment fitted to your vehicle.
The multi-functional indicator offers you a range of useful information.
Note
In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of
measures.
Memory
The multi-functional indicator is equipped with two automatic memories. You can
see the memory which is currently being shown in the display from the negatively
displayed number ⇒ fig. 6.
The data of the single-trip memory (memory 1) is shown if a 1 appears in the
display. A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance
memory (memory 2).
Switching of the memory takes place when the button ⇒ page 14, fig. 7.
Single-trip memory (memory 1)
The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the igni-
tion is switched on until it is switched off. New data will also flow into the calcula-
tion of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after
switching off the ignition. The memory will be is automatically erased, on the other
hand, if the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours.
Total-trip memory (memory 2)
The total distance driven memory gathers data from any number of indvidual jour-
neys up to a total of 100 hours driving or 10 000 kilometres driven. The memory is
deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation starts from anew.
The total-trip memory will not, contrary to the single-trip memory, be deleted after
a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours.
The outside temperature ⇒ page 14
Range ⇒ page 15
Current fuel consumption ⇒ page 15
Average fuel consumption ⇒ page 15
Driving time ⇒ page 15
Distance driven ⇒ page 15
Average speed ⇒ page 16
Fig. 6 Display in engine
revolutions counter:
Multi-functional indi-
cator
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
13
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights14
Note
All information in the memory is erased if the battery of the vehicle is
disconnected.
Using the system
The rocker switch and the button are located in the grip of the
window wiper lever ⇒ fig. 7.
Selecting the memory
– Repeated short-term pressing of the button allows one to select
the individual memories.
Selecting the functions
– Press the rocker switch up or down. This will cause the individual
functions of the multi-functional indicator to appear in the display
one after the other.
Setting function to zero
– Select the memory you want.
– Press button for more than 1 second.
The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero by button :
• average fuel consumption,
• distance driven,
• average speed,
• Driving time.
You can only operate the multi-functional indicator when the ignition is switched
on. After the ignition is switched on, the function displayed is the one which you last
selected before switching off the ignition.
The outside temperature indicator will appear with a snowflake symbol and a
warning signal sounds* when the outside temperature lies between +5°C and -5°C.
The symbol warns the driver of the possible danger of ice on the road. After the
rocker switch is pressed, the function displays the one which you last selected
before switching off the ignition.
Outside temperature
The outside temperature appears in the display when the ignition is switched on.
The correct outside temperature will be indicated with a delay of 5 minutes. If the
vehicle is stationary (or driven at a very low speed) the temperature indicated may
be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature because of heat radiated by
the engine.
Fig. 7 Multi-functional
indicator: Control
elements
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
A
Fig. 8 Multi-functional
indicator: the outside
temperature
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
14
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 15
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The outside temperature indicator will appear with a snowflake symbol (warning
signal for ice on the road) ⇒ page 14, fig. 8 and a warning signal sounds* when the
outside temperature lies between +5°C and -5°C.
WARNING
Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature
display that there is no ice on the road. Please note that black ice may also be
present on the road surface even at temperatures around +5°C - warning,
drive with care!
Note
The outside temperature is not indicating when showing navigation data (guidance
to the destination). It must be called up over the menu (valid for vehicles which
have a navigation and information display).
Range
The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display. It indicates the distance
you can still drive with your vehicle based on the present level of fuel in the tank for
the same style of driving. The readout is shown in steps of 5 km.
The fuel consumption for the last 50 km is taken as a basis for calculating the range.
If you drive in a more economical manner from this moment on, the range will be
increased accordingly.
You first drive 50 km if the readout is reset (after disconnecting the battery) before
a new readout for the range is displayed.
Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres/100 km. This
information can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption you
wish to achieve.
The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low
speed.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the
display in litres/100 km ⇒ page 13. This information can help you to adapt your
style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to achieve.
If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time
you must first erase the memory at the start of the new measurement using the
button ⇒ page 14, fig. 7. A zero appears in the display for the first 300 m you
drive after erasing the memory.
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.
Note
The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.
Driving time
The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased, appears in
the display ⇒ page 13. If you wish to calculate the driving time from a particular
time of day you must first erase the memory at this moment in time by pressing the
button ⇒ page 14, fig. 7.
The maximum time indicated in both switch positions is 99 hours and 59 minutes.
The indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded.
Distance driven
The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the display
⇒ page 13. If you wish to calculate the distance driven from a particular time of day
you must first erase the memory at this moment in time by pressing the button
⇒ page 14, fig. 7.
A
B
A
B
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
15
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights16
The maximum distance indicated in both switch positions is 9999 km. The indicator
is set back to null if this period is exceeded.
Average speed
The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in
km/hour ⇒ page 13. If you wish to determine the average speed over a certain
period of time you must first erase the memory at the start of the new measure-
ment using the button ⇒ page 14, fig. 7.
A zero appears in the display for the first 100 m you drive after erasing the
memory.
Information display*
Introduction
The information display provides you with information in a convenient way
concerning the current operating state of your vehicle. The information system
also provides you with data (depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle)
relating to the radio, multi-functional indicator, navigation system and automatic
gearbox.
Certain functions and operating conditions are always being checked on the
vehicle when the ignition is switched on and also while driving.
Functional faults, if required repair work and other information are indicated by red
symbols ⇒ page 19 and yellow symbols ⇒ page 19.
Lighting up of these symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal.
Information and texts giving warnings are also shown in the display ⇒ page 20.
The display of text is possible in the following languages:
Czech, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese.
You can have the relevant language set by a specialist garage.
The following information can be shown in the display (depending on the equip-
ment installed on the vehicle):
A
B
Fig. 9 Instrument
cluster: Information
display
Menu ⇒ page 17
Door, tailgate and bonnet ajar warning ⇒ page 17
Radio display ⇒ page 18
Service Interval Display ⇒ page 11
Selector lever position for an automatic gearbox ⇒ page 90
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
16
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 17
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Menu
– You can activate the menu by pressing the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 11
for more than 1 second.
– You can select the menu through the rocker switch . The selected
information is displayed after pressing the button for a short time
or after releasing the rocker switch (after about 4 seconds).
You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed on
the vehicle):
After selecting the menu DISPLAY OFF the display is switched off. Press rocker
switch for at least 1 second to switch the display on again.
The Information CAR STATUSflashes in the menu if there is something which is not
in proper order on the vehicle (e.g. warning of a low fuel level). The first warning will
be displayed after switching over to CAR STATUS. You can then display other oper-
ating conditions afterwards using the switch-over function (such as water level
low).
Door, tailgate and bonnet ajar warning
The door, tailgate compartment door and bonnet ajar warning lights up when at
least one of the three items door, tailgate or bonnet are not closed when the igni-
tion is turned on. The symbol indicates which door is still open or whether the tail-
gate or bonnet is not closed ⇒ fig. 12.
The symbol goes out as soon as the doors, tailgate and bonnet are completely
closed.
Fig. 10 Information
display: Menu
Fig. 11 Information
display: Control
elements
A
A
A
B
A
A
TRIP COMPUTER (AUTO COMPUTER) ⇒ page 13
CAR STATUS ⇒ page 18
NAVIGATION ⇒ page 20
DISPLAY OFF
A
A
Fig. 12 Information
display: Door warning
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
17
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights18
As an additional warning signal, a 3 time peep sounds if the car is driven at a speed
of more than 6km/hour and if the door or the luggage compartment door is open.
Radio display
These displays appear in addition to the normal information in the radio display.
Auto Check Control
Car state
The Auto Check Control carries out a check of certain functions and vehicle compo-
nents. The check is performed constantly when the ignition is switched on, both
when the vehicle is stationary, as well as when driving.
Operational faults, urgent repairs, service work or other information appear in the
display of the instrument cluster. The displays are shown with a red or yellow light
symbol depending on the priority of the message.
The red symbols indicate danger (priority 1) while the yellow symbols indicate a
warning (priortity 2). Information for the driver may also appear in addition to the
symbols ⇒ page 20.
Investigate the displayed faults as soon as possible. If several operational faults exist
at the same time, the symbols will appear one after the other and are each visible
for about 2 seconds.
The error messages are faded out after 10 seconds or by actuating the rocker switch
⇒ page 17, fig. 11 and are stored under the information CAR STATUS.
There is at least one error message to be read when the term CAR STATUS is
flashing in the main menu. The display will show STATUS 1/2 (for example) if a
number of error messages are present. This display indicates that the first of a total
of two error messages should be displayed.
Actuate the rocker switch , to call up the individual error messages.
If a fault occurs, a warning signal will also sound in addition to the symbol and text
in the display:
• Priority 1 - three warning signals,
• Priority 2 - one warning signal.
Operational check of the automatic gearbox
When the ignition is switched on, the Auto Check Control automatically carries out
an operational check. The following text will appear first in the display if the selector
lever is the position P or N:
P LOCKED (P locked)
or
N LOCKED (N locked)
You must depress the brake pedal first and press the Shiftlock button at the same
time in order to move the selector lever out of these positions.
The text will disappear once you select a drive position (R, D etc.), and the Auto
Check Control function is displayed.
If the Auto Check Control detects faults, these will be displayed about 15 seconds
after starting the engine in place of the text shown above. A warning signal sounds
at the same time.
Fig. 13 Information
display: Radio display
A
A
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
18
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 19
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Red symbols
A red symbol signals danger.
Proceed as follows if a red symbol is displayed:
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the engine off.
– Investigate the function indicated.
– Obtain professional assistance.
Meaning of the red symbols:
Three successive warning signals will sound if a red symbol appears. The symbol
continues flashing until the fault is rectified.
If several operational faults of priority 1 exist, the symbols appear one after the
other and are each illuminated for about 2 seconds.
Yellow symbols
A yellow symbol signals a warning.
The meaning of the yellow symbols:
One warning signal will sound if a yellow symbol appears.
Faults in the brake surface ⇒ page 27
Coolant level too low/coolant temperature
too high
⇒ page 23
Engine oil pressure too low ⇒ page 24
Fig. 14 Information
display: Oil pressure is
low
Fuel level low ⇒ page 24
Check engine oil level, engine oil sensor faulty ⇒ page 24
Brake pad worn ⇒ page 25
Washer fluid level low ⇒ page 25
Light bulb defect ⇒ page 25
Light bulb in the brake light defect ⇒ page 25
Fig. 15 Information
display: Fuel level low
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
19
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights20
If several operational faults of priority 2 exist, the symbols appear one after the
other and are each illuminated for about 2 seconds.
Check the relevant function as soon as possible.
Navigation system*
The controls for the navigation system, radio, CD player are located in the centre
console on both sides of the monitor screen. Navigation data is also shown in the
information display of the instrument cluster.
Information and warning texts are displayed preferentially when the navigation
system is switched on.
Operation of the navigation system is described in separate operating instructions
to be found in the on-board literature.
Warning lights
Overview
The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.
Fig. 16 Instrument cluster with warning lights
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
20
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 21
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• If you do not pay attention to the warning lights coming on and the corre-
sponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in severe body
injuries or major vehicle damage.
• The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. There is a risk
of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine
compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. It is also
essential to observe all warnings ⇒ page 152.
Turn signal lights (to the left) ⇒ page 22
Turn signal lights (to the right) ⇒ page 22
Main beam ⇒ page 22
Low beam ⇒ page 22
Rear fog light ⇒ page 22
Dynamo ⇒ page 22
Fog lights* ⇒ page 22
Power steering* ⇒ page 22

EPC fault light (petrol engine) ⇒ page 23
Glow plug system (diesel engine) ⇒ page 23
Turn signal system for vehicles towing a
trailer*
⇒ page 23
Coolant temperature/coolant level ⇒ page 23
Electronic immobiliser ⇒ page 24
Fuel reserve ⇒ page 24
Engine oil ⇒ page 24
Brake pad wear* ⇒ page 25
Bulbs* ⇒ page 25
Open door* ⇒ page 25
Fluid level in windshield washer system* ⇒ page 25
Boot lid* ⇒ page 25
Control system for exhaust ⇒ page 26
Traction control system (TCS)* ⇒ page 26
Electronic stability programme (ESP)* ⇒ page 26
Antilock brake system (ABS)* ⇒ page 26
Brake system ⇒ page 27
Airbag system ⇒ page 27
Seat belt warning light* ⇒ page 28
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
21
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights22
Note
• Arrangement of the indicator lights depends on the model and model version.
The symbols shown in the following functional description are to be found as indi-
cator lights in the instrument cluster.
• Operational faults are shown in the instrument cluster as red symbols (priority
1 - danger) or yellow symbols (priority 2 - warning).
Turn signal system 
Either the left or right indicator light flashes depending on the position of the
turn signal lever.
The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a turn signal light fails. This does
not apply when towing a trailer.
Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the
turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash.
Further information about the turn signal system ⇒ page 45.
Main beam
The indicator light comes on when the main beam is selected or also when the
headlight flasher is operated.
Further information about the main beam ⇒ page 45.
Low beam
The indicator light comes on when low beam is selected ⇒ page 43.
Rear fog light
The warning light comes on when the rear fog lights are operating ⇒ page 44.
Alternator
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on. It should go
out after the engine has started.
If the warning light does not come on after the ignition is switched on, drive to
the nearest specialist garage.
If the warning light does not go out after the engine has started, or comes on when
driving, drive to the nearest specialist garage. The vehicle battery will be discharged
in this case so switch off all non-essential electrical components.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
ALTERNATOR WORKSHOP! (ALTERNATOR WORKSHOP!)
Caution
If the warning light comes on when driving and in addition the warning light
(cooling system fault) also comes on in display, you must then stop the car imme-
diately and switch the engine off - risk of engine damage!
Fog lights*
The warning light comes on when the fog lights are operating ⇒ page 44.
Power steering*
The warning light comes on for approx. 2 seconds after the ignition is switched
on. There is a fault in the electronics for the power-assisted steering if the warning
light lights up while driving or does not go out 2 seconds after switching on the igni-
tion. Contact a specialist garage to obtain assistance.
The warning light does not come on when there is a lack of oil.
Further information ⇒ page 130, “Power steering*”.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
22
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 23
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
There is no power-assisted steering support when the vehicle is being towed
without the engine running or when the power-assisted steering is defect. The
vehicle is fully steerable however. There is simply increased force required to turn
the steering wheel.
EPC fault light  (petrol engine)
The  (Electronic Power Control) warning light comes on for a few seconds when
the ignition is switched on.
There is a system fault in the engine control system if the warning light  does not
go out or comes on or flashes while driving. The engine management system
selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest
specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
ENGINE WORKSHOP! (ENGINE FAULT - WORKSHOP!)
Glow plug system (diesel engine)
The indicator light lights up for a cold engine when switching on the ignition
(pre-heat position) 2 ⇒ page 82. Start the engine just as soon as the indicator light
goes out.
The glow plug indicator light will come on for about 1 second if the engine is at a
normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C. This
means that you can start the engine right away.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the indicator light does not come on
at all or lights up continuously. Contact a specialist garage as soon as possible to
obtain professional assistance.
There is a system fault in the engine control system if the warning light has
started to flash while driving. The engine management system selects an emer-
gency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by
adopting a gentle style of driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
ENGINE WORKSHOP! (ENGINE FAULT - WORKSHOP!)
Turn signal system for vehicles towing a trailer*
The indicator light on vehicles towing a trailer flashes together with the respec-
tive indicator light for the turn signal system.
The indicator light does not flash if a turn signal light on the trailer or on the
vehicle is not operating.
Coolant temperature/coolant level
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
1)
when the ignition is switched on.
The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low if the warning light
does not go out after the engine is started or flashes while driving.
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.
In this case stop and switch the engine off and check the coolant level; top up the
coolant as necessary.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Keep the engine switched off and
obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to
severe engine damage.
If the coolant is within the specified range, the increased temperature may be
caused by an operating problem at the coolant fan. Check the fuse for the coolant
fan, replace it if necessary ⇒ page 188, “Fuse assignment at battery”.
Do not continue driving if the warning light does not go off although the fluid is at
the correct level and also the fuse of the fan is in proper order. Contact a specialist
garage to obtain assistance.
1)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after
switching the ignition on, but only if the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level
is too low.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
23
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights24
Please also refer to the additional instructions ⇒ page 156, “Cooling system”.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
STOP CHECK COOLANT SERVICE MANUAL (STOP! CHECK COOLANT
OWNER'S MANUAL)
WARNING
• If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning light system ⇒ page 45.
• Take care when opening the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot,
the cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding. It is best to allow the
engine to cool down before removing the cap.
• Do not touch the coolant fan! The coolant fan may switch on automati-
cally even if the ignition is off.
Electronic immobiliser
Data is compared between the ignition key and the control unit when switching on
the ignition. The indicator light
will light up for a few seconds when ignition key
authorisation is confirmed.
The warning light will start flashing continuously if a non-authorised ignition key
(for example the wrong ignition key) has been used. The engine cannot be started
⇒ page 30.
It is only possible to start the engine of the vehicle with a Genuine Škoda key with
the matching code.
Fuel reserve
The warning light comes on, if the fuel level is still about 7 litres.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
PLEASE REFUEL
Engine oil
The warning light lights up red (low oil pressure)
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
2)
when the ignition is switched on.
Stop the vehicle and switch the engine off if the warning light does not go off
after the engine has started or flashes while driving. Check the oil level and top up
with oil as necessary ⇒ page 155.
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with oil. Keep the engine switched off and obtain
professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe
engine damage.
Do not drive any further if the warning light flashes even if the oil is at the correct
level. Do not run the engine not at idling speed either. Contact the nearest specialist
garage to obtain professional assistance.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
STOP! OIL PRESS. STOP MOTOR! SERVICE MANUAL (STOP! OIL PRESSURE
STOP ENGINE! OWNER'S MANUAL)
The warning light lights up yellow* (oil quantity too low)
If the warning light lights up yellow, the quantity of oil in the engine is probably too
low. Check as soon as possible the oil level or top up ⇒ page 155 with engine oil.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
CHECK OIL LEVEL
2)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after
switching the ignition on, but only if a fault exists or the engine oil level is too low.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
24
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 25
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds. If
no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on again after
driving about 100 km.
The warning light flashes yellow* (engine oil level sensor faulty)
A fault on the engine oil level sensor is indicated additionally by an audible signal
and the warning light coming on several times after the ignition has been switched
on.
In this case have the engine inspected without delay by a specialist garage.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP! (OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP)
WARNING
• If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning light system ⇒ page 45.
• The red oil pressure light is not an oil level indicator! One should
therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably after every refu-
eling stop.
Thickness of the brake pads*
If the warning light comes on, contact a specialist garage immediately and have
the brake pads on all of the wheels inspected.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
CHECK BRAKE PADS
Light bulbs*
The warning light comes on if a light bulb is damaged:
• brakes applied (brake light),
• in lighting (low beam and/or rear light).
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
LIGHTS FAILURE
or
BRAKE LIGHTS FAILURE
Open door*
The warning light comes on, if one or several doors are opened.
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display comes on when
switching the ignition off. The warning light goes out about 15 seconds after locking
the vehicle.
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display goes out after
switching the ignition off.
Windshield washer fluid level*
The warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on if there is insuffi-
cient fluid in the windshield washer system. Top up with liquid ⇒ page 164.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
TOP UP WASH FLUID
Luggage compartment door*
The warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on if the luggage
compartment door is open.
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
25
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights26
Control system for exhaust
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on.
If the warning light does not go out after starting the engine or it lights up or flashes
when driving, a fault exists in an exhaust relevant component. The engine manage-
ment system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the
nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
EMISSIONS WORKSHOP! (EMISSIONS WORKSHOP)!
Traction control system (TCS) *
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is activated.
The warning light will come on and remains on if the TCS is switched off or if there
is a fault in the system.
The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that the TCS
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.
Further information about the TCS ⇒ page 126, “Traction control system (TCS)*”.
Electronic stability programme (ESP)*
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
Components of the ESP system also include the Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL), and the Antilock Brake System ABS (ABS).
The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is activated.
The warning light will come on and remains on if the ESP is switched off or if there
is a fault in the system.
The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that the ESP
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.
Further information on the ESP ⇒ page 125, “Electronic stability programme
(ESP)*”.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)*
The EDL is a part of the ESP. A fault in the EDL is indicated by the ESP warning light
in the instrument cluster. Have the vehicle inspected immediately by your
specialist garage. Further information on the EDL ⇒ page 127.
Antilock brake system (ABS)*
The warning light shows the functionality of the ABS.
The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition has been switched
on or when starting the engine. The warning light goes out after an automatic check
sequence has been completed.
A fault in the ABS
The system is not functioning properly if the ABS warning light does not go out
within a few seconds after switching on the ignition, does not light up at all or lights
up while driving. The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system. Visit
a specialist garage as quickly as possible and adjust your style of driving in the
meantime since you will not know how great the damage is.
Three additional warning tones will sound if there is a major fault in the ABS.
Further information about ABS ⇒ page 129, “Antilock brake system (ABS)*”.
A fault in the entire brake system
If the ABS warning light comes on together with the brake system warning light
(handbrake must be released), there is a fault not only in the ABS but also in
another part of the brake system ⇒ .
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL (STOP! BRAKE FAULT OWNER'S
MANUAL)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
26
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 27
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• If the brake system warning light comes on together with the ABS
warning light stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir ⇒ page 159, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has dropped
below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact
a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.
• Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ page 152, “Working in the
engine compartment” before checking the brake fluid level and opening the
bonnet.
• If the brake fluid is at the correct level, the ABS control function has
failed. The rear wheels may then block very rapidly when braking. In certain
circumstances, this can result in the rear end of the car breaking away - risk
of skidding! Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage and have the
fault rectified.
Brake system
The warning light flashes or comes on if the brake fluid level is too low, if there
is a fault in the ABS or if the handbrake is applied.
If the warning light flashes (handbrake is not applied), stop and check the brake
fluid level ⇒ .
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
STOP BRAKE FLUID OWNER'S MANUAL
If there is a fault in the ABS which also influences the function of the normal brake
system (e.g. distribution of brake pressure), the ABS warning light comes on
together with the brake system warning light . Be aware that not only the ABS but
also another part of th brake system is defective ⇒ .
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.
One should get used to high pedal forces, long braking distances and long free play
of the brake pedal when driving to the next specialist garage.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
STOP BRAKE FAULT OWNER'S MANUAL
For further information on the brake system ⇒ page 128, “Brakes”.
Handbrake applied
The warning light also comes on if the handbrake is applied. An audible warning
is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6
km/h.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
HANDBRAKE ON
WARNING
• Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ page 152, “Working in the
engine compartment” before checking the brake fluid level and opening the
bonnet.
• If the brake system warning light does not go out a few seconds after
switching on the ignition or comes on when driving, stop immediately and
check the brake fluid in the reservoir ⇒ page 159, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid
level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of
accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.
Airbag system
Monitoring the airbag system
The warning light
comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
There is a fault in the system if the warning light does not go out or comes on or
flashes while driving ⇒ . This also applies if the warning light does not come on
when the ignition is switched on.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
AIRBAG FAULT
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
27
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights28
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically, when one
airbag has been switched off
The passenger front airbag and also possibly the passenger side airbag which
have been switched off using the vehicle system tester:
• The warning light lights up for 3 seconds after switching on the ignition and
then flashes for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second intervals.
Front or side airbags for passenger which have been switched off using the
switch (for switching off airbags)* in the storage compartment on the front
passenger side:
• The warning light comes on for 3 seconds after the ignition has been
switched on.
• Switching off airbags is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting
up of the indicator light   (airbag switched off) ⇒ page 115.
WARNING
Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a fault
exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event
of an accident.
Note
Further information about switching off airbags ⇒ page 114, “Deactivating an
airbag”.
Seat belt warning light*
The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on as
a reminder to fasten the seat belt.
If you do not fasten the seat belt, a long warning signal sounds for 6 seconds.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
FASTEN SEATBELT
For further information on the seat belts ⇒ page 103, “Why seat belts?”.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
28
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking 29
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Unlocking and locking
Key
Description
The vehicle is supplied with two keys without remote control ⇒ fig. 17 or with two
keys with remote control*. Depending on the equipment, the keys with remote
control can differ ⇒ fig. 18. The keys fit in all vehicle locks.
Key ring
The key ring only has the key number on it which is essential for producing other
keys. This number can be used to order replacement keys from the Škoda Service
Partners.
The key ring with the number should be separately and securely kept in safe
keeping since keys can only be replaced if they are lost or damaged by giving this
number. You should also therefore give this key ring to the purchaser when selling
the vehicle.
WARNING
• Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle - even if it is
only for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the
vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical
equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of injury!
• Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
has come to a stop. The steering lock might otherwise engage unintention-
ally - risk of accident!
Caution
• Each key contains electronic components; therefore protect them against mois-
ture and severe shocks.
• Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean as impurities (textile fibres, dust
etc.) have a negative effect on proper operation of the keys and the ignition lock.
Note
Please approach a Škoda Service Partner if you lose a key since he can obtain a new
one for you.
Fig. 17 Set of keys
without remote control
Fig. 18 Radio-operated
key
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
29
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking30
Changing the key battery
Each radio-operated key contains a battery which is housed in the cover
of the transmitter housing ⇒ fig. 19. We recommend that you have
the batteries of the key replaced by a Škoda Service Partner. You should,
however, proceed as follows if you wish to replace the battery yourself:
– Fold open the key.
– Use a screwdriver to carefully lever off the front part of the key
⇒ fig. 19 from the transmitter housing .
– Take off the cover of the transmitter housing ⇒ fig. 20 in direction of
arrow.
– Take the used battery out of the housing cover.
– Insert the new battery. Ensure that the “+” symbol on the battery is
facing downwards. The correct polarity is also shown on the cover of
the transmitter housing.
– Insert cover with battery in place at the rear of the transmitter housing
and press both parts together.
– Insert the transmitter housing into the front part of the key so that the
two parts lock into each other.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of an old battery in accordance with environmental regulations.
Note
• The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original
battery.
• If it is still not be possible to unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote control
even after replacing the battery this means that the system has to be synchronised
⇒ page 37.
Electronic immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser prevents the vehicle being operated by an
unauthorised person.
An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deacti-
vated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock. The elec-
tronic immobiliser is automatically activated when you withdraw the ignition key
from the lock.
Note
It is only possible to start the engine of your car with a Genuine Škoda key with the
matching code ⇒ page 24.
Fig. 19 Disconnect key
with radio remote
control
B1Z-0042HB1Z-0042H
Fig. 20 Cover of the
transmitter housing
A
B
A
A
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
30
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking 31
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Locking
Valid for vehicles without a central locking system:
Locking from outside
The securing head will move upwards or downwards in the door when
unlocking or locking ⇒ page 34, fig. 23.
Locking from inside
All closed vehicle doors are locked by pressing in the securing knobs from the
inside. The doors cannot be opened from the outside when the securing knobs
have been pressed in. The vehicle doors can be opened from the inside as follows:
• The door is unlocked by actuating the door-opening lever.
• The door opens upon actuating the door-opening lever again.
Note
• The opened door cannot be locked with the securing knob. This prevents the
possibility of forgetting the key in the locked vehicle.
• The opened side doors at the rear and the front passenger door are locked by
pressing in the securing knob and slamming the door closed.
• Please refer to the safety guidelines ⇒ in “Description” on page 32.
Child safety lock
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from
the inside.
The rear doors are equipped with a child safety lock. You can switch the
child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.
Switching child safety lock on
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit in the rear door to the left in the
direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 21.
Switching child safety lock off
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit to the right against the direction of
the arrow.
So long as the child safety lock is switched on it is not possible to open the door
from the inside with the door opening lever. In this case the door can be opened
only from the outside.
A
A
Fig. 21 Child safety locks
on the rear doors
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
31
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking32
Central locking system*
Description
Unlocking or locking the vehicle causes all doors to be unlocked or locked at the
same time by the central locking system. The boot lid is unlocked when opening. It
can be opened by pressing the hand grip above the licence plate.
Operation of the central locking system is possible:
• from the outside using the vehicle key ⇒ page 33,
• using the buttons for the central locking system ⇒ page 34,
• with the securing knobs in the front doors ⇒ page 34, fig. 23 (only for
locking),
• by using the remote control ⇒ page 36.
Convenience operation of windows
One can open and close the electrically powered windows when opening and
closing the vehicle ⇒ page 39, “Window convenience operation”.
Opening a single door*
This function allows one to just unlock the driver's door. The other doors remain
locked and are only unlocked when the command is repeated. The single door
opening function can be first activated by recoding the control unit of the central
locking system. This work is undertaken by a Škoda Service Partner can give you
more information.
Automatic locking*
All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a speed
of about 15 km/h.
If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again. In
addition, it is possible for the driver to unlock the car by pressing the central locking
button or by pulling the door opening lever.
If you wish, your Škoda Service Partner can convert the central locking system of
your car to the automatic locking mode.
WARNING
• Locking the doors prevents involuntary opening in an exceptional situa-
tion (an accident). Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle
from outside, for example at road crossings. Locked doors do, however,
make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency -
danger to life!
Note
• After locking the vehicle see, if the securing knobs located on the front doors are
pushed down. On vehicles with central locking the rear doors have no securing
knobs.
• In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors
are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle.
• Only the front doors can be unlocked and locked using the key if the central
locking system fails. You can operate the rear door manually.
− Emergency locking of the door ⇒ page 34.
Safe securing
The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing system. Locking the
vehicle from the outside causes the door locks to be automatically blocked. It is not
possible to pull out the locking buttons. The indicator light in the driver's door
flashes. It is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the
inside or from the outside. This acts as an effective deterrent for attempts to break
into your vehicle.
You can deactivate the safe securing system. This is done by locking the vehicle with
the key or radio-operated key twice within 2 seconds.
Deactivating the safe securing system means that the warning light next to the
securing knob in the driver's door ⇒ page 34, fig. 23 will not flash. This is not the
case, however, for an activated anti-theft alarm system* since the indicator light is
showing that the system is active.
A
A
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
32
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking 33
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The safe securing system is again activated the next time the vehicle is unlocked and
locked again.
The doors can be opened from the inside if the vehicle is locked and the safe
securing system is deactivated:
• The door is unlocked by actuating the door-opening lever.
• The door opens upon actuating the door-opening lever again.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti-
vated, there must not be any person and animals in the vehicle as it is then
not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked
doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emer-
gency - hazard!
Unlocking the vehicle using the key
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver's door to the left into the opening
position ⇒ fig. 22.
– Pull on the door handle and open the door.
• All doors are unlocked (the securing knobs in the front doors must move
upwards).
• The boot lid is then unlocked.
• The switched on interior lights come on over the door contact.
• The safe securing system is deactivated.
• The windows are opened provided the key is held in the opening position.
• The indicator light in the driver's door stops flashing if the vehicle is not fitted
with an anti-theft alarm system* ⇒ page 38.
Note
If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system*, you must unlock the
vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door you then have to insert the key into
the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15 seconds after opening the
door. The alarm will be triggered if you do not switch on the ignition within 15
seconds.
Closing the vehicle with the key
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver door to the right into the closing
position ⇒ fig. 22.
• All doors and the boot lid are locked (the securing knobs in the front doors must
move downwards).
• The switched on interior lights go out over the door contact.
• The windows and the electric sliding/tilting roof* are closed provided the key is
held in the locking position.
• The safe securing system is activated immediately.
• The indicator light in the driver door begins flashing.
Note
The opened driver door cannot be locked. It must be locked separately after closing
it.
B1Z-0042HB1Z-0042H
Fig. 22 Turning the key
for unlocking and locking
the vehicle
A
A
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
33
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking34
Buttons for the central locking system
If the vehicle was not locked from outside, it can be unlocked or locked
with the buttons and , also if the ignition is switched off.
Locking all doors and the boot lid
– Press button ⇒ fig. 23 or the securing knob in the front door
downwards.
Unlocking all doors and the boot lid
– Press button ⇒ fig. 23.
The following applies if you have locked your vehicle using the button :
• It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety
feature, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).
• You can unlock the doors individually from the inside and open them by pulling
the door opening lever.
• Once the driver door is opened it cannot be locked again (after operating the
lock function in the button for the central locking switch) in order to avoid inadvert-
ently being locked out of the vehicle. You then have to lock a door separately after
closing it.
• In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors
are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain
access to the vehicle.
WARNING
The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off. All the
doors and the boot lid are locked. Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle since it is difficult to provide assistance from the outside when
the doors are locked. Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into
the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Note
• The door opening lever and the buttons for the central locking system do not
operate if the safe securing system is activated.
• Figure ⇒ fig. 23 shows operation of vehicles which are fitted ⇒ page 38 with
the window convenience operation*.
Emergency locking of the rear doors
An emergency locking mechanism which is visible after opening the door
is located on the face end of the rear doors. (Applies only for vehicles with
central locking.)
Fig. 23 Buttons for
central locking
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
A
A
2
A
1
Fig. 24 Rear door: Emer-
gency locking of the door
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
34
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking 35
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Locking
– Remove the panel ⇒ page 34, fig. 24.
– Insert the key into the opening under the panel and press the stopping
lever as far as the stop toward the inside.
– Re-insert the panel.
After closing the door, you can no longer open it from outside. If the child safety
lock is not switched on, it is possible to open the door from the inside by pulling
twice on the door handle. If the child safety lock is switched on, it is necesary to also
open the door from outside besides pulling twice on the inner door handle.
Luggage compartment door
Opening the boot lid for vehicles without central locking
Opening of the boot lid is achieved by pulling on the actuation lever next to the
driver's seat ⇒ fig. 25 and raising the boot lid.
The boot lid is closed by slamming it closed.
Open the boot lid by pulling on the actuating lever if it is not completely closed and
lift the boot lid up. Slam the boot lid slightly closed.
Opening the boot lid for vehicles with a central locking system
Open the boot lid by pressing the hand grip above the licence plate after unlocking
the vehicle using the key or the radio remote control* ⇒ fig. 26.
The boot lid can also be opened by pressing on the button on the remote control
with the ignition switched off. Here one should press on the button for the remote
control for over one second. The boot lid springs open and the anti-theft alarm
system* is deactivated. The anti-theft alarm system is reactivated after the boot lid
is closed.
The boot lid is closed by slamming it closed.
Open the boot lid by pushing on the hand grip if it is not completely closed and lift
the boot lid up. Slam the boot lid slightly closed.
WARNING
• Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-
wise the boot lid could open while driving - risk of accident!
A
A
B
Fig. 25 Lever for
unlocking the boot lid
Fig. 26 Handle of boot
lid
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
35
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking36
• Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise
exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!
• Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, it could crack
- risk of injury!
Note
• After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 5 seconds and
the anti-theft alarm system* is activated. This applies only if the vehicle was
locked before closing the boot lid.
• The function of the hand grip above the licence plate is deactivated when
starting off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour for vehicles with central
locking. The function of the hand grip is activated again when the vehicle has
stopped and a door is opened.
Remote control*
Description
You can use the remote control:
• to unlock and lock the car,
• unlocking boot lid.
The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the master key. The
receiver is located in the interior of the car. The operating range of the remote
control is 10 metres but this range can be reduced if the batteries are weak.
The master key has a fold-open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking
the car manually and also for starting the engine.
If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or a new unit
installed, it is then necessary for a Škoda Service Partner to initialise the system.
Only after this is it possible to again use the remote control.
Note
• The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched
on.
• The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interfer-
ence from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency
range (e.g. mobile phone, TV transmitter).
• The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti-theft alarm system
does react to the remote control at less than 3 metres away. We recommend having
the battery replaced by a Škoda Service Partner.
Unlocking and locking car
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 27 Radio-operated
key
Fig. 28 Radio-operated
key
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
36
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking 37
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The radio-operated key differs according to the equipment installed on
the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle
– Press button for about 1 second.
Locking the vehicle
– Press button for about 1 second.
Deactivating safe securing system
– Press button twice in 2 seconds. Further information ⇒ page 32.
Boot lid remote release
– Press button for about 1 second ⇒ page 36, fig. 28.
Folding out of the key
– Press button .
Folding up of the key
– Press button and collapse the key bit in the housing.
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been
unlocked. The vehicle will lock again automatically if you unlock the vehicle using
button but do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds. This
function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
The safe securing system along with the anti-theft alarm system* are, however,
deactivated during these 30 seconds.
If the single door opening function has been activated on your car, you unlock
only the driver door by pressing button once and the complete vehicle by
pressing the button twice ⇒ page 32.
When the vehicle is unlocked or locked, the interior lights in the door contact are
automatically switched on or off.
The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly
locked.
If the turn signal lights do not flash, check the doors, bonnet and boot lid again to
ensure that they are closed. If the doors, the bonnet or the boot lid remain open
when the anti-theft alarm system* is activated, the turn signal lights do not flash
until after they have been closed.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti-
vated, there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then not possible
to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it
more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Note
• Operate the radio remote control only when the doors and boot lid are closed
and you have visual contact with the vehicle.
• Once in the car, you must not press the lock button of the master key before
inserting the key into the ignition lock in order to avoid the car being inadvertently
locked and, in addition, the anti-theft alarm system* being switched on. Should this
happen, press the unlock button of the master key.
Synchonisation of the remote control
If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it is
possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no longer
synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the radio-operated key are actu-
ated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the
battery on the remote control was replaced.
This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows:
• Press any button on the remote control.
• pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1
minute.
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
4
A
3
A
3
A
1
A
1
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
37
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking38
Anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking
to break into the vehicle. The system triggers audible and visual warning signals if
an attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
How is the alarm system switched on?
The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically when the vehicle is locked
with the key on the closed driver's door or by using the remote control. It is acti-
vated 30 seconds after closing the door.
How is the alarm system switched off?
The anti-theft alarm system is switched off if the vehicle is unlocked by only using
the remote control. The vehicle is automatically locked again if the vehicle is not
opened within 30 seconds after reactivating the anti-theft alarm system.
Once you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door you then have
to insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15 seconds
after unlocking the door in order to deactivate the anti-theft alarm system. The
alarm will be triggered if you do not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds.
When is the alarm triggered?
The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored:
• Bonnet,
• Boot lid,
• Doors,
• Ignition lock,
• Vehicle interior*
3)
,
• A drop in voltage of the on-board power supply.
An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon-
nected while the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
How is the alarm switched off?
You switch the alarm off if you unlock the car with the radio remote control in the
key or if you switch the ignition on.
Deactivation of interior monitor
The process of switching off and switching on the interior monitoring system is the
same as for switching off and switching on the safe securing system ⇒ page 32.
This function allows one to leave animals in the vehicle, for example.
Note
• The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years. More detailed information is avail-
able from your Škoda Service Partner.
• Before leaving the car, check that all the doors, windows and the electric
sliding/tilting roof* are properly closed in order to ensure that the anti-theft alarm
system is fully operational.
• Coding of the radio remote control and the receptor part precludes the use of
the radio remote control from other vehicles.
Power windows*
Switch
3)
The alarm will be triggered through movement within the interior of the vehicle or an at-
tempt to steal the radio. The rear part of the interior of the vehicle is not fully monitored un-
der certain circumstances.
Fig. 29 Buttons on the
driver's door
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
38
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking 39
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on.
Opening a window
– A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the
door. The process stops when one releases the button.
– Pressing of the button in the driver's door down to the stop will cause
the window to be opened completely, automatically. Renewed
pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
Closing a window
– A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in
the door. The closing process stops when one releases the button.
– Pulling of the button in the driver's door to the stop will cause the
window to be closed completey, automatically. Renewed pulling of
the button causes the window to stop immediately.
The switch for the individual windows is located in the armrest of the driver's door
⇒ page 38, fig. 29, front passenger door and in the rear doors*.
Buttons for the power window in the armrest of the driver's door
Button for the power window in the driver's door
Button for the power window in the front passenger's door
Button for the power window in the rear door on the right*
Button for the power window in the rear door on the left*
Safety pushbutton*
Safety pushbutton*
You can deactivate the switches for power windows at rear doors by pressing the
safety pushbutton ⇒ page 38, fig. 29. The buttons for power windows at rear
doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton again.
WARNING
• If you lock the vehicle from the outside, do not leave any person in the
vehicle since it is no longer possible to open the windows from the inside in
an emergency.
• The system is fitted with a force limiter. The closing process will be stop if
an obstruction is detected and the window will open again. You should then
take particular care when closing the windows! You may otherwise suffer
severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the
window!
• It is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power
windows in the rear doors (safety pushbutton) ⇒ page 38, fig. 29 when
children are being transported on the rear seats.
Note
• After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows
for a further 10 minutes. The automatic closing and opening functions will not
operate during this time. The power windows are switched off completely once you
open the driver or front passenger door.
• When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation
system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are opened, dust as
well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at
certain speeds.
Window convenience operation
You can open and close the electrically powered windows as follows
when unlocking and locking the vehicle (just closing of the sliding roof).
Opening windows with the key
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the opening position
and hold it until all the windows are open.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
S
A
S
A
S
A
S
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
39
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking40
Closing windows with the key
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the closing position and
hold it there until all of the windows are closed.
You can interrupt the opening or closing operation of the windows immediately by
releasing the key.
WARNING
• Obstruction protection is not active during the convenience operating
feature ⇒ in “Switch” on page 38.
• You should take particular care when closing the windows! You may
otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example,
jammed in the window!
Operational faults
Electrically operated power windows do not operate
If the battery of the car has been disconnected and then reconnected, the electri-
cally operated power windows do not operate. The system must be activated.
Proceed as follows in order to re-establish the function:
• turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the closing position and hold it
there until all of the windows are closed,
• release the key,
• Once again insert the key and turn it into the closing position for about 3
seconds.
Operation in winter
Ice accumulating on the surface of the windows during the winter may result in a
greater resistance when closing the windows and the window may stop and move
back several centimetres
Proceed as follows to close the window fully:
• turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the closing position and hold it
there until all of the windows are closed,
• repeat this operation until the window stops.
WARNING
• Obstruction protection is not active during the closing of the windows
⇒ in “Switch” on page 38.
• You should take particular care when closing the windows! You may
otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example,
jammed in the window!
Electric sliding/tilting roof*
Description
The sliding/tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial ⇒ fig. 30 and only
functions when the ignition is switched on. The control dial has a number of fixed
positions.
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the sliding/tilting
roof for a further 10 minutes. It is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting
roof after opening or closing one of the front doors, however.
Fig. 30 Control dial for
the power sliding/tilting
roof
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
40
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking 41
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the
sliding/tilting roof does not close fully. Here you have to set the control dial to the
switch position and press it forward for about 10 seconds.
• It is necessary after each emergency operation (using crank handle) to move the
sliding/tilting roof into the basic position. Here you have to set the control dial to
the switch position and press it forward for about 10 seconds.
Opening and tilting
Comfort position
– Turn the switch to position ⇒ page 40, fig. 30.
Opening roof fully
– Turn the switch to position and hold it in this position (spring-
tensioned position).
Tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position .
The wind noise in the comfort position is less than when the roof is fully opened.
The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open. You can
slide the sun screen into the opened or closed position by hand when the
sliding/tilting roof is closed.
Caution
It may be necessary during winter to remove any ice and snow in the area of the
sliding/tilting roof before opening it in order to prevent damaging the opening
mechanism and the seal.
Closing
Sliding closed/closing the sliding/tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position ⇒ page 40, fig. 30.
Safety closing
The sliding/tilting roof is equipped with an overload protection system. The
sliding/tilting roof stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be
closed because there is something in the way (e.g. ice). You can close the
sliding/tilting roof completely without overload protection by pressing the switch to
the position ⇒ page 40, fig. 30 at the front or rear for as long as it takes for the
sliding/tilting roof to shut completely ⇒ .
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury!
Convenience operation
You can also close an open sliding/tilting roof from the outside.
– Turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the closing position and
hold until the sliding/tilting roof is closed ⇒ .
The closing process stops when one releases the key.
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury! The overload protec-
tion system does not function with the convenience closing.
A
A
A
A
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
A
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
41
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Unlocking and locking42
Emergency operation
You can close and/or open the sliding/tilting roof by hand if the system is
defect.
– Carefully remove the plastic cover with a screwdriver.
– Insert an Allen key, Group 4, up to the stop into the opening and close
and/or open the sliding/tilting roof.
– Re-insert the plastic cover.
– Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
Note
It is necessary after each emergency operation (using Allen key) to move the
sliding/tilting roof into the basic position. Here you have to press the control dial
forward to switch position ⇒ page 40, fig. 30 for about 10 seconds.
Fig. 31 Detail of the
headliner: Emergency
operation
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
42
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility 43
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Lights and Visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on side lights
– Turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 32 into position
.
Switching on the low beam and main beam
– Turn the light switch into position
.
– Press the main beam lever forward in order to switch on the main
beam ⇒ page 45, fig. 36.
Switching off all lights
– Turn the light switch into position O.
Low beam comes on only if the ignition is switched on. The low beam is switched
off automatically when the engine is started and after switching the ignition off;
only the side lights come on.
On models fitted with right-hand steering* the position of certain switches differs
from that shown in ⇒ fig. 32. The symbols which mark the switch positions are
identical, however.
In certain countries, the low beam is on a reduced brightness as well as the side
lights, when the ignition is switched on.
WARNING
Never drive with side lights on - risk of accident! The side lights are not
bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by
other oncoming traffic. In this case, always switch on the low beam when it
is dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
• An audible warning will sound if you withdraw the ignition key and open the
driver's door when the vehicle lights are still on.
• The acoustic warning signal is switched off over the door contact when the
driver's door is closed (ignition off). The vehicle can be parked with the side lights
on.
• If you park the car for a lengthy period, we recommend switching off all lights,
or leaving only the side lights switched on.
• The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accord-
ance with the legal requirements.
• In the event of cool or humid weather conditions, the headlights can be misted
up from inside.
− The temperature difference between interior and external area of the head-
light lenses is decisive.
− When the driving lights are switched on, the light outlet surfaces are free
from mist after a short period. The headlight lenses can possibly mist up at the
border areas.
− It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights.
Fig. 32 Dash panel: Light
switch
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
43
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility44
− This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system.
Fog lights*
Switching on the fog lights
– First of all turn the light switch into position or ⇒ page 43,
fig. 32.
– Pull the light switch out to the first notch .
The rear fog light warning light ⇒ page 20 lights up in the instrument cluster
when the fog light is switched off.
Rear fog light
Switching on the rear fog light
– First of all turn the light switch into position or ⇒ page 43,
fig. 32.
– Pull the light switch out to the second notch . The fog lights* light
up at the same time.
If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights*, the rear fog light is switched on by turning
the light switch to the position or and is pulled out directly to the position
. This switch does not have two positions, but only one position.
The rear fog light warning light
⇒ page 20 lights up in the instrument cluster
when the fog light is switched off.
Only the rear fog light of the trailer lights up automatically when you are towing a
trailer using a factory-fitted towing device which is fitted with the rear fog light .
Caution
The rear fog light should only be switched on if visibility is particularly poor
(conform with any varying legal provisions) to avoid dazzling vehicles behind your
vehicle.
Instrument lighting*
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting.
Switch on the light.
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 33 to the desired intensity of the instru-
ment lighting.
Headlamp range adjustment
Once the low beam is switched on you can then adapt the range of
the headlights to the load of the vehicle.
A
A
A
B
A
B
Fig. 33 Dash panel:
Instrument lighting
Fig. 34 Dash panel:
Lights and Visibility
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
44
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility 45
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Turn the control dial ⇒ page 44, fig. 34 until you have adjusted the low
beam so that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Settings
The positions correspond approximately to the following vehicle loads:
Front seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment laden.
Driver seat occupied, luggage compartment laden.
Caution
Set the headlight beam adjustment in such a way as to avoid dazzling oncoming
traffic.
Note
Headlights fitted with Xenon bulbs* adapt automatically to the load and driving
state of the vehicle (e.g. accelerating, braking) when the ignition is switched on and
when driving.
Switch for hazard warning lights
–Press switch ⇒ fig. 35 to switch the hazard warning light system on
or off.
All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard
warning light system is switched on. The indicator light for the turn signals and the
indicator light in the switch also flash at the same time. You can also switch on the
hazard warning light system if the ignition is switched off.
Please comply with any legal requirements when using the hazard warning light
system.
Note
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example:
• you encounter traffic congestion,
• your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs.
The turn signal and main beam lever
The parking lights and headlight flasher are also switched on and off
using the turn signal and main beam lever.
The turn signal and main beam lever perform the following functions:
A
-
A
1
A
2
A
3
Fig. 35 Dash panel:
Switch for hazard
warning lights
Fig. 36 Turn signal and
main beam lever
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
45
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility46
Right
and left turn signal light
– Push the lever upwards or downwards ⇒ page 45, fig. 36.
– If you only wish to flash three times (the so-called convenience turn
signal*), push the lever briefly up to the upper or lower pressure point
and release it.
– Turn signal for changing lanes - in order to only flash briefly, move the
lever up or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position.
Main beam
– Switch on the low beam.
– Push the lever forwards.
– Pull the lever back into the initial position in order to switch the main
beam off again.
Headlight flasher
– Pull on the lever of the steering wheel (sprung position) - the main
beam and warning light in the instrument cluster come on.
Parking light
– Switch off the ignition.
– Push the lever up or down - the right-hand or left-hand parking light
is switched on.
Information concerning the function of the lights.
• The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on. The
corresponding indicator light or in the instrument cluster also flashes.
• The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve.
• The side light and rear light on the appropriate side of the vehicle are switched
on when the parking light is selected. The parking light function only operates if
the ignition is switched off.
• An acoustic warning signal will sound when the driver's door is opened if the
lever is not in the middle position after removing the ignition key. The acoustic
warning signal will stop just as soon as the driver's door is closed.
Caution
Use main beam or the headlight flasher only if this does not risk dazzling other road
users.
Note
Use only in accordance with the legal requirements the described lighting and
signal systems.
Interior lighting
Front interior lighting and storage compartment on front
passenger side
Door contact switching mechanism (on the front and rear* door)
– Press the switch to the right into position
⇒ fig. 37.
Fig. 37 Detail of the
headliner: front interior
lighting
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
46
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility 47
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– On the version without reading lights press the switch into the
middle position
.
Switching the interior light on
– Press the switch to the left into position
.
Switching the interior light off
– Press the switch into the middle position O.
– On the version without reading lights press the switch to the right,
the symbol O appears.
Reading lights*
– Press on one of the switches ⇒ page 46, fig. 37 in order to switch
the right or left reading light on or off.
Lighting of storage compartment on the front passenger side*
– Open the flap of the storage compartment on the front passenger
side.
– The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched
on and goes out when the flap is closed.
The interior light is switched on for about 20 seconds when a vehicle with a central
locking system is unlocked, when a door is opened or when the ignition key is
removed. The requirement for this is that the switch is in the door contact position.
The inner light goes out out immediately after the ignition is switched on.
A time delay switch* causes the inner lighting on vehicles without a central locking
system stays on for a few seconds after the doors have been closed. The inner light
goes out out immediately after the ignition is switched on.
The interior lighting is switched off after about 30 minutes when a door has been
left open in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle.
Rear interior lighting* (Combi, Sedan)
The lights ⇒ fig. 38 are actuated by pressing the glass on the symbol , O or by
switching to the middle position .
The same principles apply for the interior lighting at the rear as for the for the inte-
rior lighting at the front ⇒ page 46.
Note
We recommend having the light bulbs replaced by a Škoda Service Partner.
Front door warning light*
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
Fig. 38 Roof liner light at
the rear
Fig. 39 Front door:
Warning light
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
47
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility48
The warning light is located in the door trim panel below ⇒ page 47, fig. 39.
The warning light goes on every time the door is opened.
If a door remains open, the battery will discharge.
There is a reflector installed on some vehicles instead of the warning light.
Luggage compartment light*
The lighting comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened. The luggage
compartment lighting will switch off again automatically if the boot lid remains
open for more than about 30 minutes.
Visibility
Rear window heater
– Press switch ⇒ fig. 40 to switch on the rear window heater.
The rear window heater only operates when the engine is running. An indicator
light in the switch is illuminated when the rear window heater is switched on.
The rear window heater switches off automatically after 20 minutes. If you press
the switch once again, the rear window heater is switched on permanently -
the automatic deactivation is thus deactivated.
For the sake of the environment
You should switch off the rear window heater as soon as the rear window is clear.
The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel economy
⇒ page 135, “Saving electricity”.
Sun visors
Using the sun visors can contribute to increasing road safety.
You can pull the sun visors for the driver and front passenger out of their fixture and
swivel them toward the doors in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 41. The visor
above the interior mirror* can only be folded down.
The vanity mirrors* in the sun visors are provided with covers.
Fig. 40 Switch for rear
window heater
Fig. 41 Sun visor: swivel-
ling out
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
48
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility 49
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Windshield wiper and wash system
Windshield wiper
You can operate the windscreen wipers and automatic wipe/wash
using the windscreen wiper lever.
The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ fig. 42 has the following positions:
Finger-operated wiping
– Position the lever down into position if you wish to wipe the wind-
screen only for a single wipe - spring-tensioned position.
Intermittent wiping
– Position the lever up into position .
– Set with the switch the desired break between the individual wiper
strokes
Slow wipe
– Position the lever up into position .
Fast wipe
– Position the lever up into position .
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into position and the
widescreen wiper and wash system will operate - in the sprung posi-
tion.
– Release the lever. The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper
continues for another 1 - 3 wiper strokes (depending on the period of
spraying of the windscreen).
Wiping the rear window pane*
– Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position
⇒ fig. 42, the widescreen wiper will operate every 6 seconds.
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window pane*
– Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position - the
widescreen wiper and wash system will operate - in the sprung posi-
tion.
– Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop
and the wiper to continue for another 1 - 3 wiper strokes (depending
on the period of spraying of the windscreen). The lever will stay in
position after releasing it .
Switching windscreen wipers off
– Move the lever back into its home position .
The windscreen wipers and the windscreen washer system only operate if the igni-
tion is switched on.
The rear window will be wiped again if the front window wipers are on when
reverse gear is selected.
The windscreen washer nozzles are heated* when the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 42 Windscreen
wiper lever
A
4
A
1
A
A
A
2
A
3
A
5
A
6
A
7
6
A
0
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
49
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility50
Top up with wash liquid ⇒ page 164.
WARNING
• Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visi-
bility and safe driving ⇒ page 50, “Replacing wiper blades for the wind-
screen wipers”.
• Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window cleaner could
freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
Caution
In frosty weather, please first of all check whether the windscreen wiper blades are
not frozen to the windscreen before switching them on. Switching on windscreen
wipers when the blades are frozen to the windscreen may result in damage both to
the blades and the motor of the windscreen wipers!
Note
The post-wipe function of the windscreen can be activated by a specialist garage.
The post-wipe function enables 5 seconds after the last wiper stroke another wiper
stroke, in order to wipe the last drops off the windscreen.
Headlight cleaning system*
The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen washer system has been
operated for the fifth time, the low beam or main beam are switched on as well as
the windscreen wiper lever is held in the position ⇒ page 49, fig. 42 for about 1
second.
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight
lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. Please refer to the following
guidelines ⇒ page 144, “The headlight lenses”.
You should remove any snow from the fixtures of the washer nozzles and clear ice
in winter with a de-icing spray in order to ensure proper operation of the cleaning
system.
Replacing wiper blades for the windscreen wipers
Taking off the wiper blade
– Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the
wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm ⇒ fig. 43.
– Press the securing spring in the direction of arrow and press the
wiper blade to the windscreen at the same time in the direction of
arrow ⇒ .
Attaching a wiper blade
– Push the wiper blade onto the wiper arm. The securing spring must
click into place audibly.
Wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good visibility. Wiper
blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust, insect remains and
preserving wax.
Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left
on the windscreen by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems. It is
A
5
Fig. 43 Wiper blade for
the windscreen wiper
A
A
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
50
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility 51
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
therefore important to degrease the lips of the wiper blades after every pass
through an automatic vehicle wash system.
WARNING
• If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage
to the windscreen.
• You should clean the wiper blades regularly with a windscreen cleaner in
order to avoid any smears. Clean a wiper blade with a sponge or cloth if it is
very dirty, for example from insect residues.
• Replace the wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. We
recommend having the windscreen wiper blades purchased at a Škoda
Service Partner.
Replacing the wiper blade on the rear window wiper
Taking off the wiper blade
– Fold the window wiper arm away ⇒ fig. 44.
– Hold the window wiper arm at the top end with one hand.
– Take hold of the wiper blade with the other hand and pull the wiper
blade in the direction of arrow .
Attaching a wiper blade
– Interlock the wiper blade into the window wiper arm - see arrow .
The same remarks apply here as for ⇒ page 50, “Replacing wiper blades for the
windscreen wipers”.
Rear mirror
You can adjust the exterior mirrors electrically*.
Adjust the rear mirror before commencing to drive so that there is a clear
view to the rear.
Heating of the external mirror*
– Turn the rotary knob to position
⇒ fig. 45.
Adjusting the left-hand exterior mirror*
– Turn the rotary knob to position
. The movement of the mirror surface
is identical to the movement of the rotary knob.
Fig. 44 Wiper blade for
rear window
A
A
A
B
Fig. 45 Inner part of
door: Rotary knob
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
51
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Lights and Visibility52
Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror*
– Turn the rotary knob to position
. The movement of the mirror
surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob.
Dimming the interior mirror
– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror toward rear (the lever
on the interior mirror must point forwards in it home position).
The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
• Convex (curved outward) or a spherical exterior mirrors increase the
vision field. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror.
These mirrors are only of limited use, therefore, for estimating distances to
the following vehicles.
• Use whenever possible the interior rear mirror, for estimating the
distances to the following vehicles.
Note
• Do not touch the surfaces of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is
switched on.
• You can set the exterior mirrors by hand, if the power setting function fails at any
time, by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
• Contact your specialist garage if a fault exists with the power setting of the exte-
rior mirrors.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
52
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 53
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Seats and Stowage
Front seats
Basic information
The front seats have a wide range of different settings and can thus be matched to
the physical characteristics of the driver and front passenger. Correct adjustment of
the seats is particularly important for
• safely and quickly reaching the controls,
• a relaxed, fatigue-free body position,
• achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag
system.
The chapters which follow describe the procedure which you should adopt for
adjusting the seats.
WARNING
• Never transport more occupants than the maximum seating in the
vehicle.
• Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened ⇒ page 117, “Transporting children safely” with
a suitable restraint system.
• The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surfaces of the seats. This is particularly important for the front seat
passenger. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes
necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is
deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated
position!
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Not maintaining this
minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to prop-
erly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must
always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
• Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get
behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then
no longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.
Adjusting the front seats
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
–Pull the lever ⇒ fig. 46 up and push the seat into the desired posi-
tion.
– Release the lever and push the seat further until the lock is heard
to engage.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 46 Controls at seat
A
1
A
1
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
53
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage54
Adjusting height of seat*
– Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever upwards.
– Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever down-
wards.
Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
– Relieve any pressure on the backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the
handwheel to adjust the angle of the backrest.
The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be pressed
to the floor with slightly bent legs.
The backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper
point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms.
WARNING
• Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!
• Take care when adjusting the seat! Adjusting the seat without care can
lead to bruises or injuries.
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system -
risk of injury!
Head restraints
Adjusting the height of a head restraint
– Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it up or
down in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 47. Best protection is achieved if
the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part
of your head ⇒ page 100, fig. 103.
A
2
A
2
A
3
B1Z-0042HB1Z-0042H
Fig. 47 Adjusting head
restraint
B1Z-0042HB1Z-0042H
Fig. 48 Removing a head
restraint
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
54
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 55
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Adjusting the angle of a head restraint*
– The head restraint can be matched to the head of the occupant by
adjusting the angle in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 47.
Adjusting the angle of the head restraint provides enhanced comfort
for the user.
Removing and installing a head restraint
– Pull the head restraint up out of the backrest of the seat as far as the
stop (on the rear head restraints fold forward the seat backrest).
– Press the locking button in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 48 and pull
the head restraint out.
– To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the backrest of the
seat far enough until you hear the locking button engage.
The head restraints of the front seats can be adjusted for height and angle*. The
outer head restraints are adjustable for height. The middle rear head restraint* is
adjustable in two positions ⇒ page 55.
The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant.
Correctly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective
protection for the occupants ⇒ page 100.
You must always press the securing button ⇒ page 54, fig. 48 when pushing the
tilting head restraints* out of the upper setting into the lower setting.
WARNING
• The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective
protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.
• Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints - risk
of injury!
Middle rear head restraint*
The middle head restraints can be adjusted to two settings, the upper one and the
lower one. The upper setting is interlocked into place.
You must always press the securing button ⇒ fig. 49 when removing the head
restraint and when pushing it out of the upper setting into the lower setting.
WARNING
The head restraint on the middle rear seat must always be in the upper
locked position when someone is sitting there.
A
B
Fig. 49 Rear seats: the
position of the middle
head restraints
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
55
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage56
Heating the front seats*
The seating and leaning surfaces of the front seats can be heated when
the ignition is switched on.
Front seats
– Heating on the driver's ⇒ fig. 50 and front pasenger's seat can be
switched on and regulated by turning the control dial as required.
– The system is switched off by turning the control dial to the home
position “0”.
Caution
• You should not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points
in order to avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters.
• Do not clean the seats moist ⇒ page 146.
• If you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g. through medi-
cation, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend not
to use the seat heating of the driver or front passenger seat. This can lead to burns
on the back, the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating
is used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long
distances, so that in specific cases as mentioned above the body can recuperate
from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your
specific condition.
Note
The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running. This has
a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.
Rear seats
Folding the rear seats forwards
Fig. 50 Dash panel:
Control dial for heating
the front seats
Fig. 51 Folding the rear
seat forwards
Fig. 52 Unlock the seat
backrest
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
56
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 57
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
To enlarge the luggage compartment, the rear seats can be folded
forwards or the rear seats can be removed ⇒ page 58. The rear seats can
be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided rear seats*.
Folding the rear seats forwards
– Before folding the rear seats forward adjust the front seats in such a
way that they are not damaged when folding forward the rear seats.
– Pull up the rear seat in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 51 and fold
forwards in direction of arrow .
– Unlock the rear seat backrest by pulling the securing knob and fold
it forward ⇒ fig. 52.
– Pull the head restraints out of the seat backrest.
– The head restraints can be inserted into the relevant holes of the
folded forwards rear seats ⇒ page 57, fig. 53.
– Fold the seat backrests forwards completely.
Folding the rear seats back into position
– Install the head restraint in the slightly lifted rear seat backrest.
– Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the
securing knob clicks into place - check by pulling on the rear seat
backrest.
– Make sure that the red part of the securing knob is not visible
⇒ page 56, fig. 52.
– Fold the rear seat back into its original position.
The rear seat is equipped with an audible signaling of the rear seat backrest
securing system. If you unlock the rear seat backrest, the securing knob
⇒ page 56, fig. 52 pushes out from it with a red surface. If you have correctly inter-
locked the rear seat backrest, the securing knob slides back into the rear seat back-
rest and is no longer visible.
WARNING
• The belt lock and pelvic belt must be in their original position after
folding back the rear seats and seat backrest - they must be ready to use.
• The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no
objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compart-
ment if there is sudden braking - risk of injury!
• Ensure that the seat backrest on the rear seats is securely interlocked in
position when the vehicle is fitted with three-point safety belts for the
middle rear seat. It is only then that the three-point seat belt can reliably
fulfil its function.
Inserting head restraints in the rear seats
– The rear head restraints can be inserted into the relevant holes of the
folded forwards rear seats.
A
1
A
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
Fig. 53 Rear seats: Head
restraints in rear seats
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
57
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage58
Remove the rear seat
The luggage compartment can be increased in size by removing the rear
seat.
Removing
– Fold the rear seat forwards.
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow ⇒ page 58, fig. 54
and remove the rear seat from its holder.
Installing
– Press the wire clamp in the direction of the arrow and place the seat
upholstery in its holder.
– Fold the rear seat back into its original position.
Pedals
You should use only footmats which do not obstruct the movement of the pedals
and have an anti-slip protection.
We recommend only to use footmats from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer.
Operation of the pedals must not be hindered!
WARNING
• Greater pedal distances may be needed when there is a fault in the brake
system.
• Do not place any footmats or other additional floor coverings in the area
of the pedals in order to ensure that all the pedals can be fully depressed and
are able to return unobstructed to their initial position - risk of accident!
• There must be no objects on the floor which could roll under the pedals.
You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or
accelerator - risk of accident!
luggage compartment
Loading the luggage compartment
Please observe the following in the interest of having good handling char-
acteristics of your vehicle:
– Distribute the items of luggage as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
– Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or the safety net*
⇒ page 59.
In the event of an accident, there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by
small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries. The magnitude of the
kinetic energy depends on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the
weight of the object. The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case the
more significant factor.
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an unsecured
object with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times
its own weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg. You can
Fig. 54 Remove the rear
seats
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
58
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 59
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
imagine the injuries that can occur, if this “bullet” is flying through the interior
compartment and hits an occupant.
WARNING
• Store the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them to the
lashing eyes.
• Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward
during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the
occupants or other oncoming traffic. This risk is still increased, if the objects
which are flying around are hit by a deployed airbag. In this case, the objects
which are thrown back can injure the occupants - hazard.
• Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle may be affected
when transporting heavy objects as a result of the displacement of the
centre of gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accord-
ingly.
• The items carried in the luggage compartment should be stored in such
a way that no objects are able to slip forward if there are any sudden driving
or braking manoeuvres undertaken - risk of injury!
• Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise
exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!
• On no account exceed the permissible axle loads and the permissible
gross weight of the vehicle - risk of accident!
• Never transport occupants in the luggage compartment.
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of objects sliding in this area.
Note
• Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load ⇒ page 165, fig. 148.
• The air circulation in the interior of the car helps to prevent the windows from
misting up. Stale air is diverted via the outlet nozzles into the lateral trim panels of
the luggage compartment. Check for yourself that the outlet nozzles are not
covered.
Lashing eyes
Eyes are located on the sides of the loading area for lashing the goods to be loaded
⇒ fig. 55.
You can also attach a securing net* to these eyes for lashing small objects.
The securing net* and the fixing instruction is located in the well under the floor
covering of the lugagge compartment behind the spare wheel.
WARNING
• The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it
cannot move during the journey and when braking.
• If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with
unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of
braking manoeuvres or accidents. In order to prevent the items of luggage
being thrown forward, always use suitable lashing straps which are firmly
attached to the lashing eyes. Never attach a child seat to the lashing eyes!
Fig. 55 Luggage
compartment: Lashing
eyes
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
59
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage60
Folding double hooks* (Sedan)
Folding double hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are
provided on both sides of the luggage compartment ⇒ fig. 56.
An item of luggage weighing up to 5 kg can be attached to each side of the double
hook.
Fixing floor covering of the luggage compartment
A loop* (Fabia), a hook (estate car) or a folding handle with a hook (Sedan) is
located on the floor covering of the luggage compartment.
If, for example, it is necessary to have access to the spare wheel, it is possible to fix
the raised floor cover with the loop at the hook* (Fabia), with the hook at the boot
lid cutout ⇒ fig. 57 (estate car), or with the folding handle with a hook at the boot
lid cutout (sedan).
Luggage net*
The luggage net is designed for the tranportation of lighter objects.
WARNING
• In the luggage net you must only store objects (up to a weight of 1.5 kg).
Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!
• No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net, because
they can damage the luggage net.
Fig. 56 Luggage
compartment: Folding
double hooks
Fig. 57 Luggage
compartment: Fixing of
the floor covering
Fig. 58 Luggage
compartment: Luggage
net
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
60
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 61
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The luggage compartment cover*
You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the head
restraints for storing light and soft items.
The luggage compartment cover can be removed as required if one must
transport bulky goods.
– Unhook the support straps on the tailgate.
– Place the cover on the side supports.
– Pull the cover horizontally to the rear out of the front holders
⇒ fig. 59.
– Install again by pushing it forwards into the holders and hanging the
support straps on the tailgate.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover, the vehicle
occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle
collides with something.
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of objects placed in this area.
Note
When opening the boot lid, lift the luggage compartment cover - risk that objects
placed in this area can slip forward!
Luggage compartment cover (estate car)
– Pull the luggage compartment cover in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 60.
– Hang the luggage compartment cover in the recesses on the side of
the luggage compartment.
– Have the luggage compartment cover removed to transport bulky
goods. Press the slider from the side in the direction of arrow and
remove the luggage compartment cover in the direction of arrow .
Fig. 59 Removing the
luggage compartment
cover
Fig. 60 Luggage
compartment: The
luggage compartment
cover
A
1
A
2
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
61
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage62
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover, the vehicle
occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle
collides with something.
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater and luggage
compartment cover are not damaged as a result of objects placed in this area.
Net partition (Estate)*
Use behind the rear seats
Unrolling
– Fold down the rear seat backrests slightly forwards ⇒ page 56, which
makes it possible to clear the access for unrolling the net partition.
– Pull the net partition at the bracket out of the housing in direc-
tion of the holders ⇒ fig. 61.
– Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts and push the cross rod
forward.
– In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the vehicle,
mount .
– Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the
locking button clicks into place - check by pulling on the rear seat
backrest ⇒ .
Rolling up
– Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other
side and take the cross rod out of the mount ⇒ fig. 62.
– Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can roll up
slowily and without damage into housing .
Fig. 61 Unrolling net
partition
Fig. 62 Rolling up net
partition
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
62
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 63
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, you can remove the luggage
compartment cover ⇒ page 61, fig. 60.
WARNING
• Ensure that the seat backrest on the rear seats is securely interlocked in
position when the vehicle is fitted with three-point safety belts for the
middle rear seat. It is only then that the three-point seat belt can reliably
fulfil its function.
• First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts
in the front position!
Use behind the front seats
Unrolling
– Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ page 56
– Pull the net partiton net at the plate out of the housing
⇒ fig. 63.
– Insert the cross rod into the mount first on the one side and push
the cross rod forward.
– In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the vehicle,
mount .
Rolling up
– Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other
side and take the cross rod out of the mount ⇒ fig. 64.
– Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can roll up
slowily and without damage into housing .
– Fold the rear seats back into its original position.
A
C
Fig. 63 Unrolling net
partition
Fig. 64 Rolling up net
partition
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
63
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage64
WARNING
First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts in
the front position!
Removing and installing net partition housing
Removing
– Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ page 56
– Open the right rear door.
– Push the net partition housing ⇒ fig. 65 in the direction of arrow
and take it out of the mounts of the rear seat backrests in the direc-
tion of the arrow .
Installing
– Position the net partition housing into the mounts of the seat backrest.
– Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of arrow
as far as the stop.
– Fold the rear seats back into its original position.
The roof luggage rack system*
Description
Pay attention to the following points if you wish to transport luggage or other items
on the roof of your vehicle:
• A special roof luggage rack system was developed for the vehicle, that is why
you should only use a roof luggage rack which has been released for use by Škoda
Auto a.s.
• The base carrier is the basis for a complete roof luggage rack system. Separate
additional holders are required for safety reasons for transporting luggage, bikes,
surfboards, skis and boats.
• The basic version of the roof luggage rack system and further components are
obtainable as accessories from Škoda Service Partners.
• The base carrier is fixed to the roof of the vehicle using special fixtures which are
located under the roof strip.
Caution
• If you use other roof rack systems or if the roof bars are not properly fitted, then
any damage which may result to your car is not covered by the warranty agree-
ments. It is therefore essential to pay attention to the fitting instructions supplied
with the roof luggage rack system.
• On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof, ensure that the opened
sliding/tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof.
• Ensure that the opened tailgate does not collide with the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption. One should
therefore take off the roof bar system after use.
A
C
Fig. 65 Rear seats: Net
partition housing
A
B
A
1
A
2
A
1
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
64
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 65
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
A roof rail is obtainable from a Skoda Service Partner if hasn't been fitted onto an
estate car at the works.
Attachment points
Fitting
– Remove the plastic caps ⇒ fig. 66 carefully using a thin screwdriver
and while doing so do not damage the paintwork.
– The feet are inserted into the openings of the roof bars. Assembly is
described by the manufacturer of the roof luggage rack system.
Note
• The figure is not valid for an estate car.
• If you have any questions, please contact a Škoda dealer.
Roof load
Distribute weight evenly over the roof luggage rack system. The maximum permis-
sible roof load (including roof rack system) of 75 kg and the maximum permissible
total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.
You cannot make full use of the permissible roof load if you use a roof luggage rack
system with a lower load carrying capacity. The load transported on the roof
luggage rack system must not exceed the weight limit which is stated in the fitting
instructions.
WARNING
• The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably
attached - risk of accident!
• You must on no account exceed the permissible roof load, the permis-
sible axle loads and the permissible gross weight of your vehicle - risk of
accident!
• Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle change when
you transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the
displacement of the centre of gravity and the increased wind attack area -
risk of accident! You must absolutely adapt your style of driving and the
speed of the vehicle to the specific circumstances.
Fig. 66 Attachment
points for roof bars
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
65
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage66
Drinks can holder*
The drinks can holder is designed to place 0.33 litre drinks cans in.
– Press on the symbol in the direction of
⇒ fig. 67, the drinks can
holder slides out and opens up.
WARNING
• For reasons of occupant safety the drinks can holder drawer should
always be closed when driving.
• Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
the hot beverages may spill - risk of scalding!
• Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). You might be injured by them in the event of an accident.
Rear cup holder*
The drinks can holder is designed to place 0.33 litre drinks cans in.
WARNING
• Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
the hot beverages may spill - risk of scalding!
• Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). You might be injured by them in the event of an accident.
Fig. 67 Dash panel: Cup
holder
Fig. 68 Centre console:
Cup holder
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
66
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 67
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note holder
The note holder is designed e.g. for attaching a car park ticket in parking areas.
The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to
restrict the driver's vision.
Front ashtray*
Removing ashtray insert
– Fold out the ashtray cover and pull out the ashtray insert in the direc-
tion of arrow ⇒ fig. 70.
Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray insert in the guide, insert and slide in and fold down
the ashtray cover.
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Rear ashtray*
Removing ashtray insert
– Fold out the ashtray cover and pull out the ashtray insert in the direc-
tion of arrow ⇒ fig. 71.
Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray insert in the guide, insert and slide in and fold down
the ashtray cover.
Fig. 69 Windscreen:
Note holder
Fig. 70 Centre console:
Front ashtray
Fig. 71 Centre console:
Rear ashtray
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
67
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage68
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Cigarette lighter* and power socket*
Cigarette lighter
You can also use the socket on the cigarette lighter for other elec-
trical appliances.
Using the cigarette lighter
– Press in the button of the cigarette lighter ⇒ fig. 72.
– Wait until the button jumps forward.
– Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use it.
– Insert the cigarette lighter again into the socket.
Using the power socket
– Take out the cigarette lighter.
– Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the socket of the ciga-
rette lighter.
The 12 volt power socket can also be used to supply power to electrical accessories
with a power uptake up to 180 watts.
WARNING
• Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Not paying proper attention
or incorrect use the cigarette lighter in an uncontrolled manner may result in
burns.
• The cigarette lighter and the power socket also operates when the igni-
tion is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn. This is why you should
never leave children unattended in the vehicle!
Caution
Only use matching plugs, which fulfils the DIN - ISO Standard 4165, to avoid
damaging the power sockets.
Note
Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain
the battery of the vehicle - risk of battery draining!
Fig. 72 Centre console:
Cigarette lighter
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
68
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 69
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Power socket in the luggage compartment (Combi*, Sedan*)
– Open the cover of the power socket ⇒ fig. 73.
– Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.
It fulfils the requirements of DIN standard ISO 4165 and must only be used for
connecting approved electrical accessories with a power uptake of up to 240 watts.
The vehicle battery will be discharged in the process if the engine is stationary.
The same remarks apply here as for ⇒ page 68.
Further information ⇒ page 171, “Accessories, changes and replacement of
parts”.
Storage compartments
Overview
You will find the following storage facilities in your vehicle:
WARNING
• Please do not place anything on top of the dash panel. Such objects
might slide or fall down when driving (when accelerating or cornering) and
may distract you from concentrating on the traffic situation - risk of acci-
dent!
• Ensure that when driving no objects from the centre console of from
other storage possibilities may get into the footwell of the driver. You would
then no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or accelerator
- risk of accident!
Storage compartment on the front passenger side* ⇒ page 70
Storage compartments on the driver's side ⇒ page 71
Storage drawer* ⇒ page 71
Fig. 73 Luggage
compartment: Power
socket
Storage compartment in the front seat* ⇒ page 72
Storage compartment in the front doors ⇒ page 72
Storage compartment in the luggage compartment
(estate car, sedan)*
⇒ page 72
Rear armrest with stowage compartment* ⇒ page 73
Clothes hooks* ⇒ page 73
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
69
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage70
Storage compartment on the front passenger side*
There a further storage compartment in the inner room of the storage
compartment located under the tiltable partition wall* ⇒ fig. 75.
Opening and closing the storage compartment on the front
passenger side
– Pull the handle in the lid in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 74 and pull the lid
down.
– Raise the lid and press it until the catch is heard to engage.
Folding up the partition wall
– Take hold of the partition wall at the edge or in the recess and folds it
open in the direction ⇒ fig. 75.
– Press the partition wall until it clicks into place.
Folding down the partition wall
– Take hold of the partition wall at the edge (near the driver) and fold it
down into its original position.
There is a depression on the inside of the flap for placing a drinks can in and also a
holder for writing implements*.
WARNING
• The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
• The drinks can holder should not be used while driving.
Cooling of storage compartment on front passenger side*
The storage compartment is for vehicles fitted with an air-condi-
tioning system with a closable inlet for cooled air.
Fig. 74 Dash panel:
Storage compartment on
the front passenger side
Fig. 75 Storage
compartment: tiltable
partition wall
Fig. 76 Storage
compartment: Using
cooling system
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
70
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 71
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– You can switch the cooling system on or off using the control dial
⇒ page 70, fig. 76.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or interior
air to flow into the storage compartment.
The storage compartment is only cooled in the cooling mode. We recommend that
you switch off the cooling (opening concealed) if it is operating in the heating mode
or if you are not using the cooling system for the storage compartment.
Storage compartments on the driver's side
- storage compartment below steering wheel
The lockable storage compartment is opened by folding down the cover in the
direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 77.
Storage compartment is for vehicles fitted with an air conditioning system with
a closable inlet for thermally prepared air.
The air supply in the storage compartment is regulated through the pull out cap .
Pulling out the end cover in the direction of travel causes the air inlet to open while
pushing it in causes the air inlet to close.
At open air supply, air flows into the storage with a temperature which is as high as
the one out of the air outlet nozzles, depending on temperature setting.
The air inlet in the storage compartment is connected to position through
adjustment of the control dial for air distribution. This position causes the
maximum amount of air to flow into the storage compartment (depending on the
rotary regulator position for the fan).
You can use the storage compartment, for example, to temper drinks cans, etc.
If you do not use the air inlet in the storage compartment, the end cover
should always be kept closed.
There is a holder for a pen on the outside of the storage compartment .
Storage drawer*
– Press in the middle of the storage compartment ⇒ fig. 78 and the
storage compartment will come out.
WARNING
• The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must
also not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!
• The pull-out storage compartment must always be kept closed when
driving for safety reasons.
Fig. 77 Dash panel:
Storage compartments
on the driver's side
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
C
A
B
Fig. 78 Dash panel:
Storage drawer
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
71
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage72
Storage compartment in the front seat*
The storage compartment is foreseen for storing small objects of up to 1
kg. in weight.
– Tilt the lock to open the flap and pull out the flap ⇒ fig. 79.
– Tilt the lock to close the flap and press flap close.
Storage compartment in the front doors
WARNING
Use the stowage compartments in the door panels only for small items
which do not project out of the compartment in order to avoid any interfer-
ence with the proper operation of the side airbags.
Storage compartment in the luggage compartment (estate car,
sedan)*
There are storage compartments situated on the right and the left in the
luggage compartment.
– You can open the compartment by turning the locks in the direction of
arrow ⇒ fig. 81.
Fig. 79 Front seat:
Storage compartment
Fig. 80 Stowage
compartment in door
panel
Fig. 81 Luggage
compartment: Storage
compartments
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
72
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seats and Stowage 73
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Rear seat armrest with storage compartment*
– You can fold down the armrest to enhance occupant comfort
⇒ fig. 82.
The armrest includes a stowage compartment. You open the compartment by
pressing the button on the front side of the armrest and raising the cover
⇒ fig. 83.
Clothes hooks*
A clothes hook is located above the rear doors ⇒ fig. 84.
WARNING
• Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your
vision to the rear.
• Use the hooks for hanging only light items of clothing and ensure that
there are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Fig. 82 Rear seats:
Armrest
Fig. 83 Armrest:
Compartment for
stowing
Fig. 84 Area above rear
doors: Clothes hooks
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
73
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Heating and air conditioning system74
Heating and air conditioning system
Heating
Using the system
The heating system delivers air into the interior of the vehicle and
warms it as required.
Setting temperature
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 85 to the right in order to increase the
temperature.
– Turn the control dial to the left in order to increase the tempera-
ture.
Controlling blower
– Turn the blower switch into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to
switch the blower on.
– Turn the blower switch into position 0 in order to switch the blower
off.
– Pressing switch causes the recirculating air system to be switched
on - recirculated air mode ⇒ .
Control for air distribution
– You can adjust the direction of the inlet air flow ⇒ page 76 using air
distribution regulator .
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order
to ensure that the heating and ventilation systems operate properly.
All controls apart from the control dial can be set to any desired intermediate
position.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up.
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your
attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows
begin misting up.
Note
• The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and side
windows. No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the
heating comfort.
• The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage
compartment.
Fig. 85 Heating: Control
elements
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
D
A
C
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
74
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Heating and air conditioning system 75
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Set heating
Recommended settings of heating controls for:
Defrosting the windscreen and side windows
• Turn control dial ⇒ page 74, fig. 85 to the right up to the stop,
• Blower switch in position 4,
• Turn the air distribution control into the position ,
• Close the air outlet vents 3,
• Open air outlet vents 4 ⇒ page 76, fig. 86 and point towards the side window.
Keeping windscreen and side windows demisted
We recommend that you use the following setting in cases where the windows are
misted up more than usual (e.g. when it is raining):
• Control dial where necessary to the heating range,
• Blower switch in position 2 or 3,
• Control dial to or as required or to any desired position between
these symbols,
• Close the air outlet vents 3,
• Open air outlet vents 4 and point towards the side window.
Warming up the inside of the vehicle as rapidly as possible
• Turn control dial to the right up to the stop,
• Blower switch in position 4,
• Turn the air distribution control into the position ,
• Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4,
• We recommend that you briefly switch on the recirculated air mode with the
pushbutton . The windows can steam up in this position however.
Heating the vehicle to a comfortable temperature
We recommend the following setting once the windows are no longer misted up
and the desired temperature has been reached:
• Control dial at the desired heat output,
• Blower switch in position 2 or 3,
• Turn the air distribution control into the position ,
• Close the air outlet vents 3,
• Open the air outlet vents 4,
• Set the air distribution regulator as required between positions and ,
if the windscreen gets misted up again.
Fresh air mode - ventilation
Non pre-warmed fresh air streams through the air inlet nozzles 3 and 4 for the
following settings.
Recirculated air mode must not be switched on.
• Turn the control dial ⇒ page 74, fig. 85 to the left up to the stop,
• Blower switch in the desired position,
• Turn the air distribution control into the position ,
• Open air outlet vents 3 and 4 ⇒ page 76, fig. 86
The control dial can be set to other positions as required.
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle
and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from
getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or
when standing in a traffic jam.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press button , the button symbol
lights up ⇒ page 74, fig. 85.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press button again, the button symbol
goes out.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
75
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Heating and air conditioning system76
The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control
is in position ⇒ page 74, fig. 85. You can also switch recirculated air mode on
again from this setting by repeatedly pressing button .
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your
attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows
begin misting up.
Air outlet vents
Fig. 86 Air outlet vents
Open air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel (not when in the end position).
Close air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel into the end position.
Redirecting air flow
– Swivel upward or downward the grille of the vents in order to change
the direction of the air flow using the vertically arranged thumbwheel.
– Turn the horizontal thumbwheel on the vent to the right or left in order
to change the air flow to the appropriate side.
You can set the air supply to the individual vents with the air distribution control
⇒ page 74, fig. 85. Air outlet vents 3 and 4 can also be opened or closed individu-
ally.
Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents according to
the setting of the control dial ⇒ page 74, fig. 85 and according to atmospheric
conditions.
Air conditioning system*
Description
The air conditioning system is a combined cooling and heating
system. It makes it possible to optimally control the air temperature
at any season of the year.
Description of the air conditioning system
It is important for your safety and for your driving comfort that the air conditioning
system is operating properly.
The air conditioning system operates when switch ⇒ page 77, fig. 87 is
pressed and the following conditions are met:
• engine running,
• outside temperature above +5 °C,
• blower switch switched on (positions 1 to 4).
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in the
vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this
particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity. The system
prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year.
A
C
A
C
A
A
AC
A
E
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
76
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Heating and air conditioning system 77
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance the
cooling effect ⇒ .
Air at a temperature of about 5°C may flow out of the vents under certain circum-
stances when the cooling system is operating. Lengthy and uneven distribution of
the air flow out of the vents (in particular at the leg area) and large differences in
temperature, for example when getting out of the vehicle, can result in chills in
sensitive persons.
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order
to ensure that the heating and ventilation systems operate properly.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air condi-
tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is quite normal
and not an indication of a leak!
WARNING
• For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the
windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about
how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist
and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.
• You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of
time, as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert
your attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an
accident increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows
begin misting up.
Note
We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air
mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the inte-
rior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning system.
This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating
which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replace-
ment of compressor).
Using the system
Setting temperature
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 87 to the right in order to increase the
temperature.
– Turn the control dial to the left in order to increase the tempera-
ture.
Controlling blower
– Turn the blower switch into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to
switch the blower on.
– Turn the blower switch into position 0 in order to switch the blower
off.
– Pressing switch causes the recirculating air system ⇒ page 79
to be switched on.
Control for air distribution
– You can adjust the direction of the inlet air flow ⇒ page 80 using air
distribution regulator .
Fig. 87 The air condi-
tioning system: Control
elements
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
D
A
C
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
77
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Heating and air conditioning system78
switching cooling on and off
– Press the switch . The symbol
 in the switch comes on.
– When you again press the switch , the cooling system is switched
off. The symbol
 in the button is no longer illuminated.
The set temperature will be automatically maintained other than when the
control dial is on the extreme right or extreme left position:
Extreme right position - full heating.
Extreme left position - full cooling.
The controls and can be set to any desired intermediate position.
The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up.
Note
• The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and side
windows. No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the
heating comfort.
• The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage
compartment.
• If the cooling system has not been switched on for a lengthy period, odours may
be produced at the evaporator because of deposits. Switch the air conditioning
system on at least once a month for approximately 5 minutes at the highest blower
stage - also during the cold season of the year - in order to remove such odours.
Also open a window for a short time.
• Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode ⇒ page 79.
Setting air conditioning system
Recommended settings of air conditioning controls:
Defrosting the windscreen and side windows
• Turn control dial ⇒ page 77, fig. 87 to the right up to the stop
• Blower switch in position 4
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Close the air outlet vents 3
• Open air outlet vents 4 ⇒ page 80, fig. 88 and point towards the side window.
Keeping windscreen and side windows demisted
We recommend that you use the following setting in cases where the windows are
misted up more than usual (e.g. when it is raining):
• Blower switch in position 2
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Close the air outlet vents 3
• Open air outlet vents 4⇒ page 80, fig. 88 and point towards the side window
• Switch on the cooling system by pressing button .
Warming up the inside of the vehicle as rapidly as possible
• Turn control dial to the right up to the stop
• Blower switch in position 4
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 4
• We recommend that you briefly switch on the recirculated air mode with the
pushbutton . The windows can steam up in this position however.
Heating the vehicle to a comfortable temperature
We recommend the following setting once the windows are no longer misted up
and the desired temperature has been reached:
• Control dial at the desired heat temperature
• Blower switch in position 2 or 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 4
• Set the air distribution regulator as required between positions and ,
if the windscreen gets misted up again.
Cooling down the inside of the vehicle as rapidly as possible
• close all windows and the sliding/tilting roof
AC
A
E
AC
A
A
A
C
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
B
A
C
A
E
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
78
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Heating and air conditioning system 79
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Turn the control dial to the left up to the stop
• Blower switch in position 4
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4
• Switch on the cooling system by pressing button .
• We recommend that you briefly switch on the recirculated air mode with the
pushbutton .
Optimum cooling
• Control dial at the desired heat temperature. This temperature will be main-
tained automatically.
• Blower switch in position 1, 2 or 3
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4
• Switch on the cooling system by pressing button .
• We recommend setting the air outlet vents 3 and 4 in such a way that the air
flows to the rear over the heads of the occupants. Do not switch to recirculated air
mode.
Fresh air mode - ventilation
Non pre-warmed fresh air streams through the air inlet nozzles 3 and 4 for the
following settings.
• Turn the control dial ⇒ page 77, fig. 87 to the left up to the stop
• Blower switch in the desired position
• Turn the air distribution control into the position
• Open air outlet vents 3 and 4 ⇒ page 80, fig. 88
• Switch off the recirculated air mode by pressing button .
• Switch off the cooling by pressing button
The control dial can be set to other positions as required.
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle
and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from
getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or
when standing in a traffic jam.
Switching recirculated air mode on
–Press button ⇒ page 77, fig. 87, the button symbol
lights up.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press button again, the button symbol
goes out.
The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control
is in position ⇒ page 77, fig. 87. You can also switch recirculated air mode
on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing button .
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your
attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows
begin misting up.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
E
A
D
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
E
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
C
A
C
A
D
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
79
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Heating and air conditioning system80
Air outlet vents
Fig. 88 Air outlet vents
Open air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel (not when in the end position).
Close air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel into the end position.
Redirecting air flow
– Swivel upward or downward the grille of the vents in order to change
the direction of the air flow using the vertically arranged thumbwheel.
– Turn the horizontal thumbwheel on the vent to the right or left in order
to change the air flow to the appropriate side.
You can set the air supply to the individual vents with the air distribution control
⇒ page 77, fig. 87. Air outlet vents 3 and 4 can also be opened or closed individu-
ally.
Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the air outlet vents according to the setting
of control dial ⇒ page 77, fig. 87 and the atmospheric conditions.
Using the air conditioning system economically
The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when
in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption.
It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the inte-
rior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to allow
the heated air to escape.
The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window is
open.
The desired interior temperature can also be achieved without switching in the
cooling system just by switching to fresh air mode.
For the sake of the environment
When you economize on fuel, you also reduce pollutant emissions.
Operational problems
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5 °C,
there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be:
• The fuse on the air conditioning system has blown. Check the fuse, replace it if
necessary ⇒ page 185.
• The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the
coolant temperature of the engine is too hot ⇒ page 10.
If you are not able to rectify the operational problem yourself, or if the cooling
capacity decreases, switch the cooling system off. Contact a specialist garage.
A
C
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
80
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Starting-off and Driving 81
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Starting-off and Driving
Setting steering wheel position*
You can set the height and the forward/back position of the steering
wheel to the desired position.
– Adjust the driver seat ⇒ page 53.
– Pull the lever below the steering column ⇒ fig. 89 down ⇒ .
– Set the steering wheel to the desired position (concerning height and
forward/back position).
– Then push the lever up against the steering column until it locks into
place.
WARNING
• You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving!
• The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering
wheel ⇒ fig. 90. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
• For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to avoid the
steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving - risk of
accident!
• If you adjust the steering wheel further towards the head, you will reduce
the protection offered by the driver airbag in the event of an accident. Check
that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest.
• When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the
outer edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering
wheel firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle
of the steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases,
injuries to the arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver
airbag is deployed.
Fig. 89 Adjustable
steering wheel: Lever
below steering column
Fig. 90 Safe distance to
steering wheel
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
81
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Starting-off and Driving82
Ignition lock
Petrol engines
- ignition switched off, engine off
- ignition switched on
- start engine
Diesel engines
- fuel supply interrupted, ignition switched off, engine off
- heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on
• You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
- start engine
Applies to all models:
Position
To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel until
the steering locking pin is heard to engage. You should always lock the steering as
a general rule if you leave your vehicle. This acts as a deterrent against possible theft
of your vehicle ⇒ .
Position
Move the steering wheel back and forward a little if the ignition key cannot, or
cannot easily be turned into this position, in order to release the steering lock.
Position
The engine is started in this position. At the same time switched on low beam or
main beam or other electrical components with major power consumption are
briefly switched off. The ignition key moves back into position when one
releases the key.
The ignition key must be turned back into position each time before starting the
engine again. The starter repeat lock in the ignition lock prevents the starter being
engaged when the engine is running and thus getting damaged.
WARNING
• When driving, the ignition key must always be in the position (igni-
tion switched on) without the engine running. This position is indicated by
the warning lights coming on. If this is not the case, it could result in unex-
pected locking of the steering wheel - risk of accident!
• Do not withdraw the ignition key from the lock until the car has come to
a stop. The steering lock can engage immediately - risk of accident!
• Always withdraw the ignition key if you are going to leave the vehicle,
even for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the
vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical
equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of injury!
Starting the engine
General
You can only start the engine only using an original ignition key.
• Place the gearshift lever into neutral (or place the selector lever to the position
P or N in the case of an automatic gearbox) and put on the handbrake firmly before
starting the engine.
Fig. 91 Ignition lock
positions
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
2
A
1
A
2
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
82
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Starting-off and Driving 83
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• The clutch pedal should be fully depressed when starting the engine which
means that the starter only has to crank the engine.
• Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be damage
to the starter.
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine until oil pressure can be built up in the hydraulic valve
clearance compensation. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
If the engine does not start ...
You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid ⇒ page 180.
It is only possible to tow-start vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox. The tow-
starting distance must not be more than 50 metres ⇒ page 183.
WARNING
• Never run the engine in non ventilated or enclosed areas. The exhaust
gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon
monoxide a poisonous gas - hazard! Carbon monoxide can cause uncon-
sciousness and death.
• Never leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
Caution
• The starter may only be operated (ignition key position ), if the engine is not
running. If the starter is immediately operated after switching off the engine, the
starter or the engine can be damaged.
• Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads as long as the
engine has not yet reached its normal operating temperature - risk of damaging the
engine!
• Vehicles which are fitted with an exhaust gas catalytic converter should not be
tow-started over a distance of more than 50 metres.
For the sake of the environment
Never warm up the engine when the vehicle is standing. Drive off right away.
Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the
pollutant emissions are lower.
Petrol engines
These engines are fitted with a starter system which selects the correct fuel/air
mixture for every external air temperature.
• Do not operate accelerator before and when starting engine.
• Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start
right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.
• It is possible that the fuse on the electrical fuel pump is defect if the engine still
does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary ⇒ page 185.
• If the engine does not start, contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain
professional assistance.
It may be necessary, if the engine is very hot, to slightly depress the accelerator
after the engine has started.
Diesel engines
Glow plug system
Diesel engines are equipped with a glow plug system, the preglow period being
controlled automatically in line with the coolant temperature and outside temper-
ature.
The preglow indicator light comes on after the ignition has been switched on.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
• You should start the engine immediately after the glow plug warning light
has gone out.
A
3
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
83
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Starting-off and Driving84
• The glow plug warning light will come on for about one second if the engine is
at a normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C. This
means that you can start the engine right away.
• Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start
right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.
• It is possible that the fuse on the diesel preglow system is defect if the engine
still does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary ⇒ page 185.
• Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.
Starting the engine after fuel tank has run dry
It may take longer than normal to start the engine after refuelling if the fuel tank has
run completely dry - up to one minute. This is because the fuel system must first of
all be filled while the attempting to start the engine.
Switching off the engine
– The engine can be switched off by turning the ignition key from posi-
tion ⇒ page 82, fig. 91 into position .
WARNING
• Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary - risk of acci-
dent!
• The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater
physical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because
if you do not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.
Caution
you should not switch the engine off right away at the end of your journey after the
engine has been operated for a lengthy period at high loads but should be allowed
it to run at idling speed for about 2 minutes. This prevents any accumulation of heat
when the engine is switched off.
Note
• The radiator fan may continue running for a further 10 minutes or so after the
engine and the ignition have been switched off. The coolant fan may, however, also
switch on again after some time if the coolant temperature rises because of an
accumulation of heat in the engine or if the engine is warm and the engine
compartment is additionally heated by strong sunlight.
• This is why particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine
compartment ⇒ page 152, “Working in the engine compartment”.
Shifting (manual gearbox)
Shift into reverse only when the car is stationary. Depress the clutch pedal and hold
it fully depressed. Wait a moment before engaging reverse gear in order to avoid
any shift noises.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the igni-
tion is on.
WARNING
Never engage the reverse gear when driving - risk of accident!
A
1
Fig. 92 The shift pattern:
5-speed or 6-speed
manual gearbox
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
84
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Starting-off and Driving 85
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• One should not lay the hand on the shift lever while driving the vehicle. The
pressure of the hand will be transferred to the gearshift forks in the gearbox. This
can, over a period of time, lead to early wear of the gearshift forks.
• Depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gears, in order to avoid unneces-
sary wear and damage.
Handbrake
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up fully.
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time press in the
locking button ⇒ fig. 93.
– Hold the button pressed and push the handbrake lever down fully
⇒ .
The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied, provided
the ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds and the following text appears in the display* if you have
inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied:
"Handbrake on"
The handbrake warning is activated if you drive at a speed of more than 6 km/h for
more than 3 seconds.
WARNING
• Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake
which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating
which will have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system - risk
of accident! In addition this can result in premature wear of the rear brake
pads.
• Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The children might, for
example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The vehicle
might then move off - risk of accident!
Caution
After the car has come to a stop, always first of all apply the handbrake firmly before
then additionally engaging a gear (manual gearbox) or moving the selector lever
into position P (automatic gearbox).
Fig. 93 Centre console:
Handbrake
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
85
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Starting-off and Driving86
Parking aid*
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles behind the vehicle.
The audible parking aid determines the distance between the rear bumper and an
obstacle located behind the vehicle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The sensors
are integrated in the rear bumper.
Range of sensors
The clearance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle (area
⇒ fig. 94). The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the
clearance is reduced.
A continuous tone sounds from a clearance of just 30 cm (Bereich ) - danger
area. You should not reverse any further after this signal sounds!
Activating
The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and the
ignition is turned on. This is confirmed by a brief acknowledgement signal.
Deactivating
The parking aid is deactivated by removing the reverse gear.
WARNING
• The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when parking the
vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.
• You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no
small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., behind your
vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the
sensors.
Note
• The parking aid does not operate if you are towing a trailer (applies to models
which feature a factory-fitted towing device*).
• A system fault is indicated if a warning signal sounds for about 5 seconds after
switching the ignition on and engaging reverse gear and there is no obstacle close
to your vehicle. Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
• The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to
operate properly.
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Introduction
The cruise control system (CCS) maintains a constant speed, more than 30 km/h (20
mph), once it has been set, without you having to depress the accelerator pedal.
This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and
braking power of the engine. The cruise control system makes it possible - particu-
larly on long journeys - for you to rest your “accelerator foot”.
WARNING
• The cruise control system must not, for safety reasons, be used in dense
traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads or
loose chippings) - risk of accident!
Fig. 94 Parking aid:
Range of sensors
A
A
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
86
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Starting-off and Driving 87
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• In order to prevent unintentional use of the cruise control system, always
switch off the system after use.
Note
• Models fitted with a manual gearbox: Always depress the clutch pedal if you
switch on the cruise control system when the gearbox is in Neutral. Otherwise the
engine can rev up unintentionally.
• The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving
on steep downhill sections. The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which
it travels. One should shift down in good time to a lower gear or slow the vehicle
down by applying the foot brake.
• It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the
cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P, N, R or 1.
Storing a speed
The cruise control system is operated by means of the slide switch and
pushbutton in the left lever of the multi-functional switch.
– Move the slide switch ⇒ fig. 95 into the ON position.
– Press pushbutton once the required speed has been achieved.
After you have pressed press button , the speed you have just selected is main-
tained at a constant speed without having to depress the accelerator.
You can increase the speed by depressing the accelerator. Releasing the acceler-
ator will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed.
This does not apply, however, if you drive at a speed which is more than 10 km/h
higher than the set speed for a period of more than 5 minutes. The stored speed will
be cancelled in the memory. You then have to re-store the desired speed.
One can reduce the speed in the usual manner. The system is switched off tempo-
rarily by actuating the brake or clutch pedal ⇒ page 88.
WARNING
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that
moment before resuming the stored speed.
Changing a stored speed
You can also change the speed of the vehicle without depressing the
accelerator.
Faster
– You can increase the stored speed without depressing the accelerator
by shifting the slide switch ⇒ fig. 95 to the left into the RES posi-
tion.
– If you hold the button pressed in the RES position, the speed of the car
will increase continuously. Release the slide switch once the vehicle
has reached the desired speed. The set speed is then stored in the
memory.
Slower
–You can reduce the stored speed by pressing button .
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 95 Operating lever:
Pushbutton and slide
switch on the cruise
control system
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
87
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Starting-off and Driving88
– Pressing and holding down the slide switch in this postion will cause
the speed of the vehicle to be decreased continuously. Once the car
has reached the desired speed, release the button. The set speed is
then stored in the memory.
– If you release the button when the car is travelling at a speed of less
than 30 km/h, the speed is not stored, the memory is erased. It is then
necessary to increase the speed of the car to more than 30 km/h and
to once again store the speed with the pushbutton ⇒ page 87,
fig. 95.
Switching off the cruise control system temporarily
– You can switch off the cruise control system temporarily by
depressing the brake pedal or clutch pedal, on models with auto-
matic gearbox and only with brake pedal.
– You can likewise switch off the cruise control system by pushing the
switch ⇒ page 87, fig. 95 to the right into the intermediate posi-
tion before the position OFF. The slide switch then moves back auto-
matically into the ON position.
The set speed remains stored in the memory.
The Resumption of the stored speed is achieved by releasing the brake or clutch
pedal, on vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox only after releasing the brake pedal
and after shortly shifting the slide switch ⇒ page 87, fig. 95 to the left up to the
stop into the position RES.
WARNING
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that
moment before resuming the stored speed.
Switching off the cruise control system completely
– Move the slide switch ⇒ page 87, fig. 95 up to the stop into the
OFF position.
A
B
A
A
A
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
88
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Automatic gearbox* 89
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Automatic gearbox*
4-speed automatic gearbox
Information for driving with an automatic gearbox
Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically.
Starting-off and Driving
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever),
move the selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D ⇒ page 90,
fig. 96, and then release the Shiftlock button.
– Wait a moment until the gearbox has shifted (a slight engagement
nudge can be felt).
– Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator ⇒ .
Stopping for a short time
– The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stop-
ping just for a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is sufficient to hold
the vehicle stationary using the foot brake. The engine can, however,
be allowed just to idle.
Parking
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector
lever to P and then release the Shiftlock button.
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N
⇒ page 82.
It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface.
When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then
move the selector lever into position P. This is to ensure that there is no excessive
pressure acting on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move
the selector lever out of position P.
If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first neces-
sary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of the
engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever.
WARNING
• Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the
selector lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of acci-
dent!
• Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of
an accident!
• When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary
to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever
(except P and N) since the power transmission is never completely inter-
rupted, also not when the engine is idling - the vehicle "creeps".
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
89
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Automatic gearbox*90
Selector lever positions
The selector lever position you have engaged is shown in the information display
of the instrument cluster with the corresponding gear symbol highlighted ⇒ fig. 97.
P - Parklock
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position.
The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary ⇒ .
If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position, you must press the
Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and at the same time depress the
brake pedal.
R - Reverse
Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine
idling ⇒ .
The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be
pressed, if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R, P or N.
The reversing lights come on when the selector lever is moved into position R when
the ignition is also on.
N - Neutral
The transmission is in Neutral in this position.
The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer than 2
seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N into another posi-
tion, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at less than 5 km/hour or
on a stationary vehicle.
D - Drive, position for driving forward
When the selector lever is in this position, the forward gears are shifted up and
down automatically in line with engine load, vehicle speed and the dynamic shift
programme (DSP).
You must depress the brake pedal ⇒ if you wish to move the selector lever into
position D from N when the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km/hour or is
stationary.
3 - Position when driving in hilly areas
We recommend this position if driving with the selector lever in position D would,
in certain circumstances, result in the gearbox frequently shifting between the
gears.
The gearbox shifts up and down automatically into first, second and third gear in
line with engine load, driving style and vehicle speed. Fourth gear remains locked
out in this case. This makes it possible to exploit greater engine braking power when
the accelerator is released ⇒ .
The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving out of posi-
tion 3 into position D.
Fig. 96 Selector lever
Fig. 97 Information
display in the instrument
cluster Selector lever
positions
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
90
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Automatic gearbox* 91
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
2 - Position when driving in mountainous regions
This position of the selector lever is suitable for long sloping sections.
The gearbox shifts up and down automatically into first and second gear in line with
engine load, driving style and vehicle speed. The third and fourth gears remain
locked out in order to avoid unnecessary gear changes. Enhanced engine braking
power is thus available.
The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must not be pressed when moving out of
position 2 into position 3.
1 - Position for extreme mountainous sections
This position of the selector lever is suitable for very steep sections of road.
The vehicle will only drive first gear. The second, third and fourth gears remain
locked out. This position offers you the maximum possible engine braking power.
The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving out of posi-
tion 2 into position 1.
The cruise control system is locked in position 1.
WARNING
• Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of
an accident!
• When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary
to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever
(except P and N) since the power transmission is never completely inter-
rupted, also not when the engine is idling - the vehicle "creeps".
• You must on no account unintentionally operate the throttle (e.g. by
hand from the engine compartment) if a drive position is engaged when the
car is stationary. The vehicle would otherwise immediately start off - also
when the handbrake is firmly applied - risk of an accident!
• You must move the selector lever into position P and firmly apply the
handbrake first before you or any other person opens the bonnet and starts
working on the engine when it is running - risk of accident! It is also essential
to observe all warnings ⇒ page 152, “Working in the engine compartment”.
Note
• Take your foot off the accelerator if you inadvertently shift into N when driving
and wait until the engine speed has dropped to the idling speed range before
shifting into D.
• If you shift gear manually it is possible to select positions 3, 2 and 1, but the
automatic gearbox will not shift down until there is no risk of the engine
overrevving.
Selector lever lock
Automatic selector lever lock
With the ignition on, the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions P and N.
You must depress the brake pedal first and press the Shiftlock button at the same
time in order to move the selector lever out of these positions. The following will be
displayed in the information display*:
P LOCKED (P locked)
or
N LOCKED (N locked)
Symbol also lights up in the selector lever cover until the brake pedal is actuated.
A time delay element ensures that the selector lever is not blocked when rapidly
switching over the position N (e.g. from R to D). This does, for example, allow one
to seesaw out a stuck vehicle. The selector lever lock will click into place if the lever
is in the N position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being pressed.
The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed
of less than 5 km/hour. The lock is switched off automatically into position N when
the car is travelling at a higher speed.
Shiftlock button
The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever
positions being engaged inadvertently. The selector lever lock is cancelled when
you press the Shiftlock button.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
91
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Automatic gearbox*92
Kickdown function
The kickdown function provides you with maximum acceleration
power.
Depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point casues the automatic
gearbox to shift down into a lower gear (in line with vehicle speed and engine
speed). The gearbox shifts up into the next higher gear when the engine has
reached its maximum revolutions.
WARNING
Please note that using the kickdown function can result in the driven wheels
spinning on a smooth or slippery road surface - risk of skidding!
Dynamic shift programme
The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically. Shifting up and
down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre-defined
driving programmes.
Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the most
economical driving programme. Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible
and shifting down as late as possible will have a favourable effect on your fuel
consumption.
Adopting a faster style of driving with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal
combined with sharp acceleration and frequent changes in speed, exploiting the
top speed of the car or operating the kickdown function, will cause the gearbox to
switch over to the sporty driving programme. Shifting up later into a higher gear
makes it possible to fully exploit the power reserves of the engine. The gearbox also
then shifts down at higher engine speeds than is the case for the economy-oriented
programmes.
Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driving
is a continuous process. Irrespective of this it is, however, possible to switch into a
sporty driving programme by depressing the accelerator rapidly. The gearbox shifts
down into a lower gear matching the speed of the car and this allows you to accel-
erate rapidly (e.g. when overtaking) without having to depress the accelerator pedal
fully into the kickdown range. The original programme will be reactivated to match
your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shifted up again.
When driving in hilly regions, the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill
sections. This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negotiating
an uphill stretch. Depressing the brake pedal while driving downhill causes the
gearbox to shift down into the next lower gear. This makes it possible for you to
exploit the engine braking power without the need for shifting gears manually.
Emergency programme
An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the system.
The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are func-
tional faults in the gearbox electronics. This is indicated by all of the segments in the
display lighting up or going out.
• The gearbox still switches automaticallly but stronger switching shocks are
noticeable.
• The gearbox does not switch anymore automatically. The gearbox can now only
be switched manually but there are only 3 gears available over the selector lever
positions namely D, 3 and 2. The 1st gear and reverse are available as before over
the selector lever positions 1 and R.
If the gearbox has switched over to emergency mode, drive to the nearest
specialist garage in order to have the fault rectified.
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
Tow-starting a vehicle
It is not possible to tow-start vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox ⇒ page 182.
you can use jump-start cables connected to the battery of another vehicle for
starting your car if the vehicle battery is flat ⇒ page 180.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
92
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Automatic gearbox* 93
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Towing a vehicle
Please pay attention to the following information if it comes necessary to tow-in
your car ⇒ page 182.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
93
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Communication94
Communication
Universal telephone connection*
A telephone mount is factory-fitted. The mount is attached to the centre
console. Adapter and mobile phone are not factory-fitted by Škoda Auto.
Initialisation
– Withdraw the ignition key.
– First insert the adapter without the mobile phone into the mount
in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 98 until the adapter is touching the
stop. Press the adapter slightly in the direction of arrow until it
locks into position.
– Plug the adapter cable into the mobile phone socket. The mobile
phone socket is located below the middle of the dash panel.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Wait for approximately 15 seconds, switch off ignition.
– Insert the mobile phone into the adapter (as specified in manufac-
turer's instructions) and switch on the ignition.
Removing the mobile phone and adapter
– Press the button and remove the mobile telephone.
An initialisation must be carried out:
• after the first connection of the adapter,
• after reconnecting the battery,
• after pulling out the adapter cable from the power socket for the mobile phone.
This enables you to make full use of the advantages of a normal carphone (“hands-
free system” using a microphone integrated in the vehicle, optimal transmission of
signals using an external aerial etc.). The battery of the mobile phone is also
constantly charged.
Please contact your specialist garage if there are any points which are not clear.
Please also refer to the additional instructions ⇒ page 94, “Mobile phones and
two-way radio systems”.
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems
We recommend that you have the installation of a mobile phone and two-way
radio system in a vehicle carried out by a Škoda Service Partner.
Škoda Auto a.s. permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio
systems with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission
power of up to 10 watts.
Our Škoda Service Partners are also happy to inform you about the possibilities
available for installing and operating mobile telephones and radio transmitters
which have an output greater than 10 watts. The Škoda Service Partners can provide
you with details about the technical possibilities for retrofitting of mobile tele-
phones and radio transmitters.
Operation of mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with func-
tioning of the electronic systems of your vehicle. The reasons for this may be:
Fig. 98 Universal prepa-
ration for the mobile
phone
A
B
A
1
A
2
A
A
A
C
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
94
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Communication 95
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• no external aerial,
• external aerial incorrectly installed,
• transmission power greater than 10 watts.
You should therefore not operate a mobile phone or two-way radio system
inside the vehicle without the use of an external aerial, or with an external aerial
which has been incorrectly installed.
You should also be aware of the fact that only an external aerial makes it possible
to achieve the optimal range of such equipment.
WARNING
• If a mobile phone or two-way radio system is operated inside the vehicle
without using an external aerial, or with an external aerial which has been
incorrectly installed, the result can be excessive electromagnetic fields
which may cause harm to your health.
• Please always pay full attention to the traffic situation around you!
• You must not install two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts
on the covers of the airbags or within the immediate deployment range of
airbags. This might result in injuries to the occupants in the event of an acci-
dent!
Note
Please also refer to the operating instructions of the mobile phones and two-way
radio systems.
CD changer*
Take out and insert CD magazine
The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located under the
front passenger seat.
Take magazine out of the changer
–Open safety stop ⇒ fig. 99 fully.
–Press button . The magazine is automatically ejected.
– Take out the magazine.
Insert magazine into the changer
– Insert the magazine with the arrow of the illustration upwards up to
the stop ⇒ page 96, fig. 100. The tip of the arrow on the magazine
must point at the same time to the magazine box.
– Slide safety stop closed.
After inserting the magazine, it is analysed how many CDs are in the magazine.
If there is no magazine in the changer, NO CD MAGAZINE is displayed in the CD-
mode on the display of the radio.
Fig. 99 The CD changer
A
1
A
3
A
2
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
95
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Communication96
You can also take out the magazine when the radio is switched off.
Caution
Always close the safety cover after inserting the magazine. The safety cover protects
the CD-changer from dirt and dust particles penetrating into the CD-changer, in
order to avoid operational faults.
Note
• Described in this Owner's Manual are only the steps required for the operation
of the CD-changer.
• You will find further information for this setting menu in the Radio Owner's
Manual.
• Only Use CD-magazines from Škoda Original Accessories.
Loading magazine with CDs
–Grasp CD with the playback side to the bottom at the middle hole
and at the outer edge.
–Hold magazine with arrow illustration upwards ⇒ fig. 100.
– Insert individually CDs with the playback side to the bottom into
the magazine, until they lock in place with a locking noise. Pay atten-
tion to the CD-order on the right side of the magazine ⇒ fig. 100.
Caution
• The magazine can take up to six standard CDs (diameter 12 cm). Please do not
use 8 cm “single CDs”!
• In order to avoid malfunctions of the changer, please never use a CD protective
foil or stabilizer (obtainable on the market as CD-accessory).
Take CDs out of the magazine
– Turn the release lever in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 101.
– Slightly press out CDs through the opening on the reverse side of the
magazine. Please make sure that the CDs do not fall down!
– Take CDs out of the magazine
Replay CD
On the radio display the following information can be displayed:
Fig. 100 Loading maga-
zine with CD
Fig. 101 Take out CDs
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
96
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Communication 97
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• SHFL (Shuffleplay).
• CD1 ... CD6 - compartment of CD magazine.
• NO CD - no CD in the magazine.
• TR01, TR02 etc. - title of the selected CD.
Note
For more details see Radio Owners Manual.
Fault displays
On the radio display the following fault displays can be displayed:
• NO CD CHANGER - CD-changer is not connected to the magazine.
• NO CD MAGAZINE - no magazine in the CD-changer.
• NO CD - the selected compartment in the magazine of the CD-changer is
empty.
• SURFACE - in the selected compartment the CD with playback side is inserted
upwards.
Tips for operating the CD-changer
Please pay attention to the following notes for operating the CD-changer.
• Only clean CDs without scratches and damages should be used, in order to
guarantee a proper, high-quality CD-playback.
• Affix no labels to the CDs.
• Always store non-used CDs in the CD-storage from the Škoda genuine accesso-
ries provided for this as well as in the original folding box.
• Never expose CDs to direct sun rays.
• Use a soft, non-fluffy cloth to clean the CDs. Wipe the CD straight-lined from
the middle to the outside. Strong dirt must be eliminated with usual CD-cleaner.
• Please never use liquids such as gasoline, paint thinner or disk cleaner, other-
wise the surface of the CD could get damaged.
Precaution measures for laser equipment
Laser equipment is classified according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6/VDE 0837 in the
safety categories 1 - 4.
The Škoda CD-changer corresponds to the safety category 1.
The laser used for equipment of category 1 is to such an extent energy-poor and/or
shielded that there is no risk of danger when used in accordance with the regula-
tion.
WARNING
Please always pay full attention to the traffic situation around you!
Note
Do not remove the equipment cover. The equipment does not contain any parts,
which can be serviced by the user.
Warranty
The same guarantee conditions apply for our factory-fitted radio system as for new
vehicles.
Note
A damage in the sense of the warranty must not be the result from improper
handling of the system or from unprofessional repair attempts. In addition, no
external damage must be present.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
97
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Communication98
Technical data of car radio
Note
The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of 20 W.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
98
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Passive Safety 99
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Safety
Passive Safety
Basic information
Driving the safe way
Passive safety measures reduce the risk of injury in accident situa-
tions.
In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the subject of
passive safety in your vehicle. We have combined everything here which you
should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and
safety of children. It is therefore important, in particular, to comply with the notes
and warnings in this section for your own interest and in the interest of those trav-
elling with you.
WARNING
• This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle
for the driver and his occupants. You will find further information on safety,
which concerns you and those travelling with you, in the following chapters
of this Owner's Manual.
• The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This
applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is part of the occupant protection and it can
reduce the risk of injuries in accident situations.
“Do not put at risk” your safety and the safety of those travelling with you . In the
event of an accident, the safety equipment can reduce the risk of injuries. The
following list contains part of the safety equipment in your vehicle:
• Three-point seat belts for all the seats*,
• belt force limiter for front seats*,
• belt tensioner for front seats,
• seat belt height adjuster for front seats,
• front airbags*,
• Side airbags*,
• anchoring points for child seat using the “ISOFIX” system,
• head restraint adjustable for height,
• adjustable steering column.
The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect you
and those travelling with you in accident situations. The safety equipment does not
protect you or the people travelling with you, if you or your occupants adopt an
incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used.
For this reason you will be provided with information on why this equipment is very
important, how it protects you and the occupants, what should be observed when
using the equipment and how you and the people travelling with you can make full
use of the existing safety equipment. This Owner's Manual contains important
warning notes, which you and those travelling with you should pay attention to in
order to reduce a risk of injury.
Safety concerns everybody!
Before setting off
The driver is always fully responsible for his occupants and for the
operating safety of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please pay
attention to the following points before setting off.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
99
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Passive Safety100
• Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly.
• Inspect the tyre inflation pressure.
• Ensure that all the windows offer a good visibility to the outside.
• Safely attach the items of luggage ⇒ page 58, “Loading the luggage compart-
ment”.
• Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedal.
• Adjust the mirror, the front seat and the head restraint to match your body size.
• Point out to your occupants that the head restraints must be adjusted to match
their body size.
• Protect the children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts
⇒ page 117, “Transporting children safely”.
• Adopt the correct seated position. Also inform your occupants to adopt the
correct seated position.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly. Also inform your occupants to properly fasten the
seat belts ⇒ page 105, “How are seat belts correctly fastened?”.
What influences the driving safety?
The driving safety is primarily determined by the style of driving and
the personal behaviour of all the occupants.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving safety is
effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk. Please refer to the
following guidelines.
• Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g. by your
occupants or mobile phone calls.
• Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. through medication,
alcohol, drugs.
• Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
• Adjust the driving speed at all times to the road condition as well as to the traffic
and weather conditions.
• Take regular breaks on long journeys - at the latest every two hours.
Correct seated position
Correct seated position for the driver
Correct seated position for the driver is important for safe and
relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we
recommend the following setting.
• Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel and
your chest is at least 25 cm ⇒ fig. 102.
• Position the driver seat in the forward/back direction so that you are able to
press the pedals with your legs at a slight angle .
Fig. 102 The correct
distance of the driver
from the steering wheel
Fig. 103 The correct
head restraint adjust-
ment for the driver
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
100
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Passive Safety 101
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Adjust the backrest so that you are able to reach the highest point of the steering
wheel with your arms at a slight angle.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same
level as the upper part of your head ⇒ page 100, fig. 103.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 105, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
Driver seat adjustment ⇒ page 53, “Adjusting the front seats”.
WARNING
• The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
• The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering
wheel ⇒ page 100, fig. 102. Not maintaining this minimum distance will
mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you -
hazard!
• When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the
outer edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering
wheel firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle
of the steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases,
injuries to the arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver
airbag is deployed.
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system -
risk of injury!
• Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get
behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then
no longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.
Correct seated position for the front passenger
The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from
the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety
when an airbag is deployed.
For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
an accident, we recommend the following setting.
• Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible to the rear.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same
level as the upper part of your head ⇒ page 100, fig. 103.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 105, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated ⇒ page 114,
“Deactivating an airbag”.
Adjusting the passenger seat ⇒ page 53, “Adjusting the front seats”.
WARNING
• The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
• The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the
dash panel. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it
becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an
airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect
seated position!
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system -
risk of injury!
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
101
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Passive Safety102
Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats
Occupants on the rear seats must sit upright, keep the feet in the
footwell and must have their seat belts correctly fastened.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an acci-
dent, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following.
• Adjust the head restraints so that the top edge of the head restraints are at the
same level as the upper part of your head ⇒ page 100, fig. 103.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 105, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
• If you are transporting ⇒ page 117, “Transporting children safely” children in
the vehicle, please use a suitable child restraint system.
WARNING
• The head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size, in
order to offer an optimal protection for you and your occupants.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
put your feet out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats. You will be
exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake
or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal
injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!
• If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury
is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.
Examples of an incorrect seated position
An incorrect seated position can lead to severe injuries or death for
the occupants.
Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat belts is
properly routed. Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective
functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incor-
rect routing of the seat belt. The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occu-
pants, in particular for the children. Do not permit an occupant to adopt an incor-
rect seated position when the car is moving.
The following list contains the examples of seated positions which are dangerous
for the occupants. This list is not complete, however we would like you to get inter-
ested in this subject.
Therefore, while the car is moving never:
• stand up in the vehicle,
• stand up on the seats,
• kneel onto the seats,
• tilt the backrest fully to the back,
• lean against the dash panel,
• lie on the rear seats,
• only sit on the front area of the seat,
• sit to the side,
• lean out of the window,
• put the feet out of the window,
• put the feet on the dash panel,
• put the feet on the seat upholstery,
• occupy the footwell,
• have the seat belt not fastened,
• occupy the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to life-
threatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.
• Before setting off, please adopt the correct seated position and do not
change this seated position while the car is moving. Also advise your occu-
pants to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this seated
position while the car is moving.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
102
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seat belts 103
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Seat belts
Why seat belts?
It is a proven fact that seat belts offer good protection in accidents ⇒ fig. 104. Thus
wearing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most countries.
Seat belts which have been correctly fastened and adjusted hold the occupants of
the car in the correct seated position ⇒ fig. 104. The belts reduce the kinetic energy
(energy of motion) to a considerable extent. They also prevent uncontrolled move-
ments which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries.
The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt,
profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is optimally absorbed
by the belts. The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety
measures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy.
The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury.
Accident statistics prove that seat belts which are fastened and properly adjusted
reduce the risk of an injury and enhance the chance of survival in a major accident
⇒ page 104.
It is important that you pay attention to safety measures, particularly when trans-
porting children in the vehicle ⇒ page 117, “Transporting children safely”.
WARNING
• Fasten your seat belt each time before setting off, also when driving in
town! This also applies to the people seated at the rear - risk of injury!
• Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way
of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child ⇒ page 105, “Fastening
three-point seat belts”.
• It is important for the belt webbing to be properly routed if the seat belts
are to offer the maximum protection. You can see a description of how safety
belts should be fitted properly on the next pages.
Note
Please comply with any differing legal requirements when using the seat belts.
Fig. 104 Driver wearing
seat belt
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
103
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seat belts104
The physical principle of a frontal collision
The physical principle of a frontal accident can be explained quite simply:
Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the vehicle is
moving, both for the vehicle and its occupants. The magnitude of this kinetic energy
depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the
weight of the vehicle and the occupants. The greater the speed and weight increase,
the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an acci-
dent.
The speed of the vehicle is, nevertheless, the most important factor. Doubling the
speed of the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy
four times.
The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident
with your hands, is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces
acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body.
Even if you only drive at a speed within the range from 30 km/hour to 50 km/hour,
the forces which are produced on your body in the event of an accident can easily
exceed 10.000 N (Newton). This equals a weight of one tonne (1 000 kg).
In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt, are
thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the car,
such as steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen,⇒ fig. 105. The occupants of a
vehicle who have not fastened their seat belts may even be thrown out of the
vehicle. This can result in fatal injuries.
It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will other-
wise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an
accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not
only to himself but also for those seated at the front ⇒ fig. 106.
Important safety information regarding the use of
seat belts
The correct use of the seat belts considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
• The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or
twisted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
• It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts
are to offer their maximum protection ⇒ page 105, “How are seat belts
correctly fastened?”.
Fig. 105 The driver is
thrown forward if not
wearing a belt
Fig. 106 The rear seat
occupant is thrown
forward if not wearing a
belt
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
104
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seat belts 105
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt
together.
• The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if
you are correctly seated ⇒ page 100, “Correct seated position”.
• The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. spec-
tacles, ball-point pens, keys etc.) as this may be a cause of injuries.
• Bulky, loose clothing (e.g. a winter coat over a jacket) does not allow you
to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts.
• It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e.g. for
shortening the belts for smaller persons).
• The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
• The backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
• The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may
impair proper operation of the inertia reel ⇒ page 147, “Seat belts”.
• The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by paper or similar
objects otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly.
• Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition. If
you find seat belts which have damage to the seat belt webbing, seat belt
connections, to the inertia reels or to the lock, the relevant safety belt must
be replaced by a specialist garage.
• The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not make
an attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
• Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident
and were therefore stretched, must be replaced - this is best done by a
specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected.
The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked.
• In certain countries it is possible to use seat belts which differ in terms of
their operation from the seat belts which are described on the pages which
follow.
How are seat belts correctly fastened?
Fastening three-point seat belts
Fasten your seat belt before starting!
– Correctly adjust the front seat and the head restraint before fastening
your seat belt ⇒ page 100, “Correct seated position”.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 107 Routing of
webbing over the shoul-
ders and the lap belt
Fig. 108 Routing of belt
webbing for an expectant
mother
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
105
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seat belts106
– Slowly pull the belt webbing at the tongue of the lock over your chest
and pelvis ⇒ .
– Insert the tongue of the lock into the seat belt buckle belonging to the
seat until it is heard to lock in place.
– Pull on the belt to check that it has also reliably engaged in the lock.
Each three-point seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel. This inertia reel offers
you complete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly. If the brakes are
applied suddenly, the inertia reel will block. It also blocks the belts when the car
accelerates, when driving downhill and when cornering.
Expectant mothers must also wear the seat belt ⇒ .
WARNING
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across your neck but
must run approximately over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly
against the chest. The lap part of the belt must run across the hip and must
never be routed across the stomach. It must always fit snugly ⇒ page 105,
fig. 107. Adjust the belt webbing as required.
• The lap part of the belt should be positioned as low as possible at the
pelvis of an expectant mother in order to avoid exerting any pressure on the
lower abdomen.
• Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.
• A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body
is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
• Only insert the lock tongue into the lock which is the correct one for your
seat. This will affect the protection which the belt offers and increase the risk
of an injury.
Seat belt height adjuster
The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible for you to adapt the
routing of the three-point seat belt in the area of the shoulder to match
your body size.
– To adjust the belt height press the height adjuster and move it up or
down ⇒ fig. 109.
– Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster
has correctly locked in place.
WARNING
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt
is positioned approximately across the middle of your shoulder - on no
account across your neck.
Note
It is also possible to adapt the routing of the belt webbing on the front seats by
adjusting the height of the seat*.
Fig. 109 Front seat: Seat
belt height adjuster
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
106
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seat belts 107
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Taking seat belts off
– Press the red button in the belt lock ⇒ fig. 110. The spring force causes
the tongue of the lock to jump out.
– Guide the belt back with your hand to enable the inertia reel to wind
up the belt webbing more easily.
A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy
to get hold of.
The pelvic belt
The middle rear seat is fitted with a two-point pelvic belt.
The lock part of the two-point pelvic belt is operated in the same way as
for a three-point safety belt.
Extending the pelvic belt
– Hold the lock tongue at right angles to the belt webbing and pull
through the desired amount of belt webbing ⇒ fig. 111.
Shortening the pelvic belt
– Pull on the free end of the belt ⇒ fig. 112.
Fig. 110 Releasing lock
tongue from belt lock
Fig. 111 Extending the
pelvic belt
Fig. 112 Shortening the
pelvic belt
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
107
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Seat belts108
– Slide the excess belt length through the plastic slider.
A classic three-point safety belt is used on some vehicles instead of a pelvic belt
⇒ page 108.
WARNING
• The pelvic belt must always sit firmly across the pelvis; tighten the belt
webbing if necessary.
• An unused pelvic belt should be stowed away together with the lock for
safety reasons.
Note
The vehicles of the group N1 are not equipped with the third seat belt on the rear
seats. The vehicle is only approved for four persons!
Three-point safety belt for the middle rear seat*
It is used in the same way as the normal three-point seat belts on the left and right
(at front and rear). The three-point seat belt for the rear middle seat must be put on
first to allow the pelvic part of the belt to run between the belt lock for the right
three-point seat belt and the backrest, while avoiding crossing the belt webbing of
the right and middle seat belts.
WARNING
The three-point safety belt for the rear middle seat can only fulfil its function
reliably when the backrests are correctly locked into position ⇒ page 56.
Note
The vehicles of the group N1 are not equipped with the third seat belt on the rear
seats. The vehicle is only approved for four persons!
Belt tensioner
Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by
the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat belts.
The fastened three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a
frontal collision of a certain severity. On vehicles fitted with side airbags, a seat belt
which is not fastened is also tensioned.
The belt tensioner is deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major severity. A
powder charge is ignited in the inertia reels during deployment. The belt webbing
is pulled into the inertia reels by a mechanical system and the belt is tensioned.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions, side and
rear-end collisions, in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no
major forces are produced from the front.
WARNING
• Any work on the belt tightener system, including removal and installa-
tion of system components because of other repair work, must only be
carried out by a specialist garage.
• The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single acci-
dent. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to
replace the entire system.
• The Owner's Manual must also be handed over to the new owner if the
vehicle is sold.
Note
• Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an indi-
cation of a fire in the vehicle.
• It is essential to pay attention to relevant safety regulations if the vehicle or indi-
vidual parts of the system are scrapped. Škoda Service Partners are familiar with
these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed information in this
respect.
• When disposing of vehicle or parts of the system, it is important to comply with
the national legal requirements.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
108
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Airbag system 109
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
General information on the airbag system
The front airbag system is complementary to the three-point seat belts and offers
additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and passenger in the
event of a frontal collision.
In the event of a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to the occu-
pants to the part of their body facing the side of the accident.
The airbag system is only functional after the ignition has been switched on.
The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The
airbag warning light comes on for a few seconds each time the ignition is switched
on.
The airbag system (according to vehicle equipment) essentially consists of:
• an electronic control unit,
• the front airbags for the driver and front passenger ⇒ page 111,
• the side airbags ⇒ page 113,
• an airbag warning light in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 27,
• a front passenger airbag switch* ⇒ page 115,
• an indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag* in the middle
of the dash panel ⇒ page 115.
A fault in the airbag system exists if:
• the airbag indicator light does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
• the airbag indicator light does not go out after about 3 seconds after the ignition
is switched on,
• the airbag indicator light goes out and comes on again after the ignition is
switched on,
• the airbag indicator light comes on or flickers when driving,
• an airbag indicator light showing a switched-off front passenger airbag* in the
middle of the dash panel flashes.
WARNING
• To enable the occupants of a car to be protected with the greatest
possible effect when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be
⇒ page 100, “Correct seated position” correctly adjusted to match the body
size of the occupant.
• If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or
adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased
risk of injury in the event of an accident.
• Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a
fault exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the
event of an accident.
• No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.
• It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
• The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one
accident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been
deployed.
• The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life.
• If you sell your car, please hand over the complete vehicle documenta-
tion to the new owener. Please note that the documents relating to the
possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag are also part of the
vehicle documents!
• If the vehicle or individual parts of the airbag system are scrapped, it is
essential to observe the relevant safety precautions. Škoda Service Partners
are familiar with these regulations.
• When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important
to comply with the national legal requirements.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
109
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Airbag system110
When are the airbags deployed?
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and the front passenger
airbag* are deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major severity.
In the case of a violent side crash the side airbags* on the front seat of the vehicle
on the side on which the collision occurs are deployed.
It is also possible under certain special accident situations that the front as well as
the side airbags are deployed.
The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions, in the
case of rear-end collisions and vehicle rollover.
Deployment factors
It is not possible to state globally which deployment conditions apply to the airbag
system in every situation as the circumstances which exist in the case of accidents
vary greatly. An important role in this case, for example, is played by factors such as
the type of object against which the vehicle impacts (hard, soft), the angle of impact,
the vehicle speed etc.
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which occurs
during a collision. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates
the relevant restraint system. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is meas-
ured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified
in the control unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well
suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The airbags are not deployed if:
• ignition off,
• a minor frontal collision,
• a minor side collision,
• a rear-end collision,
• rollover.
Note
• A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is
perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
• The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has been
deployed.
• In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed:
− The interior lighting comes on (if the switch for the interior light is in the door
contact position),
− The hazard warning light is switched on,
− All the doors are unlocked.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
110
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Airbag system 111
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Front airbag
Description
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belt!
Vehicles with an airbag system for the driver and front passenger* are recognisable
by the lettering “AIRBAG” on the padded centre of the steering wheel ⇒ fig. 113
and on the right hand side of the dash panel ⇒ fig. 114.
The front airbag system, in combination with three-point safety belts, offers addi-
tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger in
the event of a frontal collision of major severity ⇒ in “Important safety informa-
tion regarding the front airbag system” on page 112.
The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but is part of the complete passive
vehicle safety concept. Please note that an airbag can only offer you optimal
protection in combination with a seat belt which is fastened.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to
also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event of
a frontal collision so as to enable the front airbags to offer the maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required
by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection ⇒ page 103, “Why
seat belts?”.
Note
The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has been
deployed.
Function of the front airbags
Risk of injury to the head and chest area is reduced by fully inflated
airbags.
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and front passenger
airbag* are deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major severity.
It is also possible under certain special accident situations that the front as well as
the side airbags are deployed.
Fig. 113 Driver airbag in
the steering wheel
Fig. 114 Front passenger
airbag in the dash panel
Fig. 115 Inflated airbags
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
111
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Airbag system112
If the airbags are deployed, the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and inflated
in front of the driver and front passenger ⇒ page 111, fig. 115. The airbags inflate
in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident. The forward movement of the driver
and of the front passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully
inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.
The specially developed airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated airbag in a
controlled manner (depending on the load of the particular car occupant) in order
to cushion head and chest areas. The airbag then deflates subsequently to such an
extent, after an accident, to again provide a clear view forward.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to injuries if
the sitting position or seated position is not correct ⇒ in “Important safety
information regarding the front airbag system” on page 112.
Important safety information regarding the front airbag system
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
• Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a
proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident,
the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
• For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel ⇒ fig. 116. Not main-
taining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be
able to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints
must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occu-
pant.
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 114, “Deactivating an airbag”
the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel).
If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries
national legal provisions also require that the side passenger airbags be
deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please
comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child
safety seats.
• There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned
between the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.
• The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash
panel on the passenger side must not be stuck onto, covered or modified in
any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a dry cloth or a cloth
moistened with water. No objects such as cup holders, mobile phone
mounts, etc. may be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be
located within the immediate area.
• No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.
Any work on the airbag system including installing and removing system
components because of other repair work (e.g. removing the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
• Never carry out changes on the front bumper or on the body.
Fig. 116 Safe distance to
steering wheel
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
112
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Airbag system 113
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Never place any objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag in
the dash panel.
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The side airbag increases protection of the passenger concerned in
the case of a side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the backrests of the front seats and
are marked ⇒ fig. 117 with the lettering “AIRBAG” on the middle part.
The side airbag system in combination with the three-point seat belts, offers addi-
tional protection for the upper area of the body (chest, stomach and pelvis) in the
event of severe side collisions ⇒ in “Important safety information on the side
airbag” on page 114.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to
also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event of
a side collision so as to enable the side airbags to offer the maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required
by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection ⇒ page 103, “Why
seat belts?”.
Function of the side airbags
Risk of injury to the upper part of the body is reduced by fully inflated
side airbags.
In the case of a violent side crash the side airbag on the front seat on the side on
which the collision occurs is deployed ⇒ fig. 118.
It is also possible under certain special accident situations that the front as well as
the side airbags are deployed.
If an airbag is deployed, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. The airbags inflate
in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated airbag
and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) is
reduced on the side facing the door.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 117 Driver seat:
Installation position of
airbag
Fig. 118 Side airbags
deployed
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
113
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Airbag system114
Important safety information on the side airbag
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 114, “Deactivating an airbag”
the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel).
If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries
national legal provisions also require that the side passenger airbags be
deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please
comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child
safety seats.
• Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side
airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This
applies in particular to children who are transported without using a suit-
able child safety seat ⇒ page 119, “Child safety and side airbag*”.
• If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may
be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This can
result in serious injuries ⇒ page 117, “What you should know about trans-
porting children!”.
• There must not be any further persons, animals as well as objects posi-
tioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. There
must also be no accessories such as cup holders, attached to the doors to
enable the side airbags to activate properly.
• Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle.
Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
clothing.
• Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks
etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be
damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!
• Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front
passenger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by Škoda
Auto. In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the
seat, use of non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably
impair the protective function of the side airbag.
• Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag
module must be repaired without delay by your specialist garage.
• The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage,
cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open
the modules.
• Any work on the side airbag system including removing and installing
system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing seats) must
only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Deactivating an airbag
Deactivating airbags
If any airbags have been deactivated, switch them on again as soon
as possible so that they are able to again provide their proper protec-
tion.
There is the technical means installed within your vehicle to switch off the front
passenger airbag or side airbag (take out of commission).
This is why you should have the deactivation of the airbags carried out by a
specialist garage.
On vehicles equipped with the switch for deactivation of the airbags, you can deac-
tivate the front passenger airbag or passenger side airbag by means of this switch
⇒ page 115.
Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances, such as if:
• you must in exceptional cases use a child seat on the front passenger seat
where the child has its back to the direction of travel of the vehicle (in some coun-
WARNING (continued)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
114
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Airbag system 115
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
tries this must be in the direction of travel due to other legal regulations applying)
⇒ page 117, “Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats”
• you are not able to maintain the distance of at least 25 cm between middle of
steering wheel and chest, despite the driver seat being correctly adjusted,
• special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a
physical disability,
• you have installed other seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags).
Monitoring the airbag system
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically, when one
airbag has been switched off
If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment:
• The airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up for about 3 seconds
after switching on the ignition and then flashes after that for about 12 seconds.
Front passenger airbags switched off using the switch for front passenger
airbags* in stowage compartment on the front passenger side:
• The airbag warning light comes on in the instrument cluster for about 3 seconds
each time the ignition is switched on.
• Switching off airbags is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting
up of the indicator light   ⇒ fig. 120.
Note
Your Škoda Service Partner will be able to advise you whether national legislation in
your country allows airbags in your vehicle to be deactivated, and which ones.
Switch for the front seat passenger airbag(s)*
The front passenger front as well as side airbag (if the vehicle is fitted with
side airbags) are switched off using the switch.
Deactivating an airbag
– Switch off the ignition.
– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the ignition key in the direction
of the arrow to the position OFF ⇒ fig. 119. The slot of the airbag
switch must be located in the vertical position.
Fig. 119 Storage
compartment: Switch for
the front seat passenger
airbags
Fig. 120 Indicator light
for a switched off front
seat passenger airbag
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
115
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Airbag system116
– Check whether the airbag indicator light
  in the middle of
the dash panel lights up ⇒ page 115, fig. 120 when the ignition is
turned on.
Switching on an airbag
– Switch off the ignition.
– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the ignition key in the direction
of the arrow to the position ON ⇒ page 115, fig. 119. The slot of the
airbag switch must be located in the horizontal position.
– Check whether the airbag indicator light
  in the middle of
the dash panel lights up ⇒ page 115, fig. 120 when the ignition is
turned on.
The airbags should only be switched off under exceptional circumstances
⇒ page 114.
Indicator light   (airbag switched off)
The airbag indicator light is located in the middle of the dash panel ⇒ page 115,
fig. 120.
If the front passenger airbag is switched on, the airbag warning light comes on for
a few seconds each time the ignition is switched on.
In cases where the front passenger front airbag or side airbag is switched off the
airbag indicator light comes on for a few seconds after switching on the ignition,
goes out for about a second and then comes on again.
There is a system fault present in the airbag switch off ⇒ if the indicator light
flashes.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for whether the airbags are switched on or
switched off.
• Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for the airbag deactivation.
• If the warning light   (airbag switched off) flashes:
− Front passenger airbag is not deployed in the event of an accident!
− It is also important to have the system inspected without delay by a
specialist garage.
WARNING (continued)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
116
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Transporting children safely 117
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Transporting children safely
What you should know about transporting children!
An introduction to the subject
Accident statistics have revealed that children are generally more
safely transported on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat.
Children younger than 12 years of age should normally travel on the rear seat of the
vehicle (take note of any national legal provisions which differ from this). They
should be secured there by means of a child restraint system or by using the existing
seat belts depending on their age, body size and weight. The child seat should be
mounted behind the front passenger seat for safety reasons.
The physical principle of an accident does, of course, also apply to children
⇒ page 104, “The physical principle of a frontal collision”. They differ from adults in
that their muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed. Thus
children are exposed to increased risk of injury.
Children should be transported by using special child safety seats in order to
reduce this risk of injury.
Only use child safety seats which are officially approved, suitable for children and
which comply with the ECE-R 44 standard, which classifies child safety seats into 5
groups ⇒ page 120, “Classification of child seats into groups”. Child restraint
systems which have been tested for conformity with ECE-R 44 have a non-detach-
able test seal (a large E within a circle and below this the test number) attached to
the seat.
We recommend that you use child safety seats from the Škoda genuine accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in Škoda vehicles. They
fulfil the standard ECE-R 44.
WARNING
Always comply with national legal provisions and instructions from the rele-
vant child safety seat manufacturer when installing and using a child seat
⇒ in “Important safety information regarding the use of child safety
seats”.
Note
Any national legal provisions which vary from the information contained in this
Owner's Manual take precedence over the information contained herein.
Important safety information regarding the use of child safety
seats
Correct use of child safety seats considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
• All the occupants of the car - in particular children - must wear a seat belt
when the car is moving!
• Children less than 1.50 m in height or younger than 12 years must not use
a normal seat belt without a child restraint system otherwise this may result
in injuries to the stomach and neck areas. Comply with the national legal
requirements.
• One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
• You can transport a child safely in a suitable child safety seat ⇒ page 120,
“Child seat”!
• Only one child may be fastened with a seat belt into a child safety seat.
• Never leave the child sitting unattended in the seat.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
117
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Transporting children safely118
• Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life-threatening tempera-
tures in the vehicle.
• Never allow your child to be transported in a vehicle without the use of a
suitable restraint system.
• Children should also never stand up in a vehicle or kneel on the seats
when the vehicle is moving. In the event of an accident the child will be
thrown through the vehicle and may as a result suffer fatal injuries, and also
injure other occupants.
• Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat if the airbag system deploys in the event of an
accident. This can result in severe or even fatal injuries.
• It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts
are to offer their maximum protection ⇒ page 105, “How are seat belts
correctly fastened?”. Pay particular attention to the information provided by
the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding correct routing of the
belt. Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause inju-
ries even in minor accidents.
• Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fittings.
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 114 the front passenger airbag
when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the
child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries
also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there
is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front
passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions
also require that the side passenger airbags be deactivated. When trans-
porting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appro-
priate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat
Child safety seats should always be attached to the rear seats.
We recommend, for safety reasons, that you always mount a child restraint systems
on the rear seats whenever possible. If you still decide, however, to use a child
safety seat on the front passenger seat then you must pay attention to the following
warnings in connection with the use of the airbag system on the front passenger
seat.
WARNING
• Warning - particular hazard! Never use a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction
of travel. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the
front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal
injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
• This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the centre
column of the body on the front passenger side ⇒ fig. 121. The sticker is
visible upon opening the front passenger door. The next warning sticker is
located on the windscreen near the front passenger seat.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 121 Sticker on the
centre column of the
body on the front
passenger side.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
118
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Transporting children safely 119
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 114, “Deactivating an airbag”
the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel).
If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries
national legal provisions also require that the side passenger airbags be
deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please
comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child
safety seats.
• If the front passenger airbag has been switched off by a specialist garage
using the vehicle system tester, the side passenger airbag* remains switched
on. The national legal provisions in certain countries require that both the
front and side airbags be deactivated. Please comply with any differing
national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
• If a child safety seat in which the child faces in the direction of travel is
used on the front passenger seat, the front passenger seat must be moved
back fully.
• As soon as you no longer use the child safety seat on the front passenger
seat, you should again have the front or the side passenger airbag
activated.
Child safety and side airbag*
Children must never be seated in the deployment area of side
airbags.
Side airbags* offer the vehicle occupants enhanced protection in the event of a
collision from the side.
The side airbags are inflated in fractions of a second in order to be able to provide
this protection ⇒ page 113, “Function of the side airbags”.
An airbag inflating develops such a strong force that an occupant who has not
adopted a correct seated position may suffer injuries. Also exposed objects which
are located within the area of the side airbag can cause injuries.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 122 Seated position
of an unprotected child at
risk from side airbag
Fig. 123 Child properly
protected by safety seat
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
119
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Transporting children safely120
This applies particularly to children if they are not transported in accordance
with legal requirements.
The child is protected when seated in a child safety seat matching its age. Adequate
room is available between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag and
head airbag. The airbag offers optimal protection.
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 114 the front passenger airbag
when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the
child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries
also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there
is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front
passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions
also require that the side passenger airbags be deactivated. When trans-
porting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appro-
priate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
• When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply
with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety
seats.
• Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of
the side airbag - risk of injury!
• Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbag -
risk of injury!
Child seat
Classification of child seats into groups
Only child safety seats which have an official approval and are suit-
able for the child, may be used.
ECE-R 44 standard applies to child safety seats. ECE-R means: Economic Commis-
sion of Europe - Regulation.
Child safety seats which have been tested for conformity with ECE-R 44 have a non-
detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and below this the test number)
attached to the seat.
Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups:
Children of more than 150 cm in height may use the seat belts fitted to the vehicle
without a seat bolster.
Use of child seats
An overview of the usefulness of child seats on each of the seats according to the
EG guidelines 77/541 and ECE 44 standard:
Universal category - seat is suitable for all approved types of child safety seats.
The seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the “ISOFIX*”system.
Group Weight
0 0 - 10 kg ⇒ page 121
0+ up to 13 kg ⇒ page 121
1 9 - 18 kg ⇒ page 121
2 15 - 25 kg ⇒ page 122
3 22 - 36 kg ⇒ page 122
Child seat
groups
Front passenger
seat
Rear seat
outside
Rear seat
middle
0
0+
1
2 and 3
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
+
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
120
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Transporting children safely 121
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Child seats of group 0/0+
The optimal solution for babies of up to about 9 months old weighing up to 10 kg
or babies up to about 18 months old weighing up to 13 kg is a child safety seat
which can be adjusted into the reclining position ⇒ fig. 124.
Child seats in which the child is facing with its back towards the direction of
travel should not be used on the front passenger seat when the vehicle is fitted
with a front passenger airbag ⇒ page 118, “Use of child safety seats on the front
passenger seat”.
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag (airbags) at
a specialist garage or with the switch for front passenger airbag(s)* when
attaching in exceptional circumstances a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel)
⇒ page 115.
• The national legal provisions in certain countries require that both the
front and side passenger airbags be deactivated. Please comply with any
differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
• If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are
deployed.
• You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just
as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety seats in Group 1
Child seats in Group 1 are for babies and small children up to 4 years of age with a
weight of between 9 and 18 kilograms. It is best for children in the lower range of
this group, to use a child seat which allows the child to sit with its back to the direc-
tion of travel. It is best for children in the upper range of the Group 0+, to use a child
seat which allows the child to sit ⇒ fig. 125 in the direction of travel.
Child seats in which the child is facing with its back towards the direction of
travel should not be used on the front passenger seat when the vehicle is fitted
with a front passenger airbag ⇒ page 118, “Use of child safety seats on the front
passenger seat”.
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag (airbags) at
a specialist garage or with the switch for front passenger airbag(s)* when
attaching in exceptional circumstances a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
Fig. 124 Child seats of
group 0/0+
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 125 Child seat with
padded table in Group 1
installed on rear seat
bench facing the direc-
tion of travel
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
121
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Transporting children safely122
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel)
⇒ page 115.
• The national legal provisions in certain countries require that both the
front and side passenger airbags be deactivated. Please comply with any
differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
• If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are
deployed.
• You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just
as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety seats in Group 2
For children up to about 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg the optimal
solution is a child safety seat in combination with the three-point seat belt
⇒ fig. 126.
WARNING
• When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply
with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety
seats. Switch off the front passenger airbag if necessary at a specialist garage
or switch it off with the switch for front passenger airbag* ⇒ page 115.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the
middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account
run across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis
and fits snugly; it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over
your hip if necessary.
• Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
Child safety seats in Group 3
For children of about 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg and of a height
of less than 150 cm, the optimal solution is a child safety seat (seat bolster) in
combination with the three-point seat belt ⇒ fig. 127.
Children of more than 150 cm in height may use the seat belts fitted to the vehicle
without a seat bolster.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 126 Child seat in
Group 2 installed on the
rear seat facing the direc-
tion of travel
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 127 Child seat in
Group 3 installed on the
rear seat facing the direc-
tion of travel
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
122
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Transporting children safely 123
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply
with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety
seats. Switch off the front passenger airbag if necessary at a specialist garage
or switch it off with the switch for front passenger airbag* ⇒ page 115.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the
middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account
run across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis
and fits snugly; it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over
your hip if necessary.
• Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX”* system
There are two fixing eyes between the backrest and the seat itself on both
of the outer rear seats for fixing the “ISOFIX” system child seat in place.
– Insert the mounting funnels onto the locking eyes between the
backrest and seat cushion ⇒ fig. 128.
– Push the notched arms of the child seat over the mounting funnels
into the locking eyes, until it is heard to lock ⇒ fig. 129.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat!
One can mount a child safety seat using the “ISOFIX” system quickly, easily and reli-
ably. Please pay close attention to instructions from the manufacturer of the child
safety seat when installing and removing the seat.
Child seats fitted with the “ISOFIX” clamping system can only be mounted and fixed
in a vehicle fitted with an “ISOFIX system” when these child seats have been
released for your type of vehicle according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
You can obtain child seats with the “ISOFIX” attachment system from Škoda Service
Partners who will also installed it as well.
Complete installation instructions are enclosed with the child safety seat.
B1Z-0042HB1Z-0042H
Fig. 128 Locking eyes
(ISOFIX system)
Fig. 129 The ISOFIX child
seat is pushed into the
mounting funnels
A
A
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
123
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Transporting children safely124
WARNING
• The locking eyes have just been developed for child safety seats which
use the “ISOFIX” system. You should therefore never attach other child
safety seats, seat belts or objects to the locking eyes - hazard!
• Ask a Škoda Service Partner whether a child seat which you bought for
another vehicle is recommended for use in a Škoda before using an “ISOFIX”
system.
• Certain child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system can be attached with
standard three-point seat belts. Please pay close attention to instructions
from the manufacturer of the child safety seat when installing and removing
the seat.
Note
• Child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system are currently available for children
weighing from 9 up to 18 kg. This corresponds to an age range of from 9 months to
4 years.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
124
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Intelligent Technology 125
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Driving Tips
Intelligent Technology
Electronic stability programme (ESP)*
General
General
The ESP aids you maintain control of your vehicle in situations in borderline driving
situations such as when negotiating a curve too fast. The risk of skidding is reduced
and your car thus offers greater driving stability depending on the conditions of the
road surface. This occurs at all speeds.
The following systems are integrated into the electronic stability programme:
• Electronic Differential Lock (EDL),
• Traction control system (TCS),
• Antilock brake system (ABS),
• Brake Assist.
Operating principle
The ESP switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a
self-test. The ESP control unit processes data from the individual systems. It also
processes additional measurement data which are supplied by highly sensitive
sensors: the rotational velocity of the vehicle about its vertical axis, the lateral accel-
eration of the vehicle, the braking pressure and the steering angle.
The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering
angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual
behaviour of the vehicle. If differences exist, such as the car beginning to skid, the
ESP will automatically brake the appropriate wheel.
The car is stabilised again by the forces which take effect when the wheel is braked.
Intervention into the brake system takes place primarily on the outer front wheel of
a vehicle which tends to oversteer (tendency for the rear of the vehicle to break
away) while occurs this is on the inner rear wheel of a vehicle which tends to under-
steer (tendency to shift out of the curve). This braking control cycle is accompanied
by noises.
The ESP operates in combination with the ABS ⇒ page 129, “Antilock brake system
(ABS)*”. If there is a fault in the ABS system, the ESP also does not operate.
The ESP warning light ⇒ page 26 lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a
fault on the ESP.
Switching off
You can switch the ESP off and on again as you wish, by pressing the button
⇒ fig. 130. The ESP warning light ⇒ page 26 lights up in the instrument cluster
when the ESP is switched off.
The ESP should normally always be switched on. It may be good practice in certain
exceptional cases, such as when you wish to have wheel slip, to switch off the
system.
Examples:
Fig. 130 ESP switch
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
125
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Intelligent Technology126
• when driving with snow chains,
• when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface,
• when it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck.
then you should switch on the ESP again.
WARNING
It is also not possible for the ESP to overcome the physical limits of the
vehicle. Even if a vehicle fitted with ESP you should still always adapt your
style of driving to the condition of the road surface and the traffic situation.
This particularly applies when driving on slippery and wet roads. The
increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than other-
wise - risk of an accident!
Note
• All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem-
free operation of the ESP. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can lead to an
undesirable reduction in the engine output.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other assign-
ment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ESP ⇒ page 171.
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning
when accelerating.
General
The TCS makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate
and climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The TCS switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a
self-test. The system monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the
ABS sensors. If the wheels are spinning, the force transmitted to the road surface is
automatically adapted by reducing the engine speed. This occurs at all speeds.
The TCS operates in combination with the ABS ⇒ page 129, “Antilock brake system
(ABS)*”. The TCS will not function if a fault exists in the ABS system.
The TCS warning light ⇒ page 26 lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a
fault on the TCS.
Switching off
You can switch the TCS off and on again as you wish by pressing the button
⇒ fig. 131. The TCS warning light ⇒ page 26 lights up in the instrument cluster
when the TCS is switched off.
Fig. 131 TCS switch
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
126
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Intelligent Technology 127
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The TCS should normally always be switched on. It may be good practice in certain
exceptional cases, such as when you wish to have wheel slip, to switch off the
system.
Examples:
• when driving with snow chains,
• when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface,
• when it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck.
then you should switch on the TCS again.
WARNING
You should always adjust your style of driving to the conditions of the road
surface and the traffic situation. The increased safety offered must not tempt
you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident!
Note
• All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem-
free operation of the TCS. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can lead to
an undesirable reduction in the engine output.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other assign-
ment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the TCS ⇒ page 171,
“Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock prevents an individual wheel from
slipping.
Models fitted with ESP are equipped with electronic differential lock (EDL).
General
The EDL makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate
and climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The EDL is activated automatically, that is without any action on the part of the
driver. It monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the ABS sensors.
Should only one drive wheel begin spinning on a slippery surface there will be an
appreciable difference in the speed of the driven wheels. The EDL function brakes
the slipping wheel and the differential transmits a greater driving force to the other
driven wheel. This control process is also accompanied by noises.
Overheating of the brakes
The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in order to
avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel which is being
braked. The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a
vehicle not fitted with EDL.
The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
• Depress the accelerator carefully when accelerating on uniformly slip-
pery road surfaces, such as ice and snow. The driven wheels might still spin
despite the EDL and affect the stability of the vehicle - risk of an accident!
• You should always adapt your style of driving to the condition of road
surface and to the traffic situation even when your vehicle is fitted with EDL.
The increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than
otherwise - risk of an accident!
Note
• If the ABS or TCS or ESP warning light comes on, this may also indicate a fault in
the EDL. Please have the car inspected as soon as possible by a specialist garage.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other assign-
ment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the EDL ⇒ page 171,
“Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
127
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Intelligent Technology128
Brakes
What has a negative effect on braking efficiency?
Wear-and-tear
Wear-and-tear to the brake pads is greatly dependent on the operating conditions
of the vehicle and your style of driving. Particularly if you drive a great deal in towns
and over short distances or if you adopt a sporty style of driving, it may be neces-
sary to have the thickness of the brake pads inspected at a specialist garage
between the service inspections.
Wet roads or road salt
There may be a certain delay before the brakes take full effect under certain condi-
tions such as when driving through water, during heavy rain showers or after the
vehicle has been washed in an automatic vehicle wash, since the brake discs and
brake pads may be moist or even have a coating of ice on them in winter. You
should dry the brakes as soon as possible (by applying and releasing the brakes
several times, if the road conditions and the traffic situation allows it).
There also may be a certain delay before the full braking efficiency is available when
driving on roads which have been treated with road salt if you have not used the
brakes for some considerable time beforehand. The layer of salt on the brake discs
and brake pads must first be rubbed off when you apply the brakes.
Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been
parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system.
We recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes at a fairly
high speed if you do not make much use of the braking system or if surface corro-
sion is present ⇒ .
Faults in the brake surface
If you notice that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the
brake pedal can be depressed further, it is possible that a brake circuit of the dual-
circuit brake system has failed. Drive, in such cases, to the nearest specialist garage
without delay in order to have the problem rectified. Drive at a reduced speed while
on your way to the dealer and adapt your style of driving to the higher brake pedal
pressure required.
Low brake fluid level
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system. The
level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically ⇒ page 27, “Brake system ”.
WARNING
• Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake
discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users
in jeopardy.
• When retrospectively mounting a front spoiler, solid wheel hubs etc. one
must ensure that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced
otherwise the braking system could run too hot.
• Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking
efficiency until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first
“run in” before they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however,
compensate for this slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pres-
sure on the brake pedal. This guideline also applies to any new brake pads
installed at a future date.
Caution
• Never allow the brakes to rub by applying slight pressure if you do not wish to
brake the vehicle. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer
braking distance and excessive wear.
• Before negotiating a steep downhill section, please reduce your speed, shift
down into the next lower gear (manual gearbox) or select a lower driving stage
(automatic gearbox). This enables you to make full use of the braking power of the
vehicle and reduces the strain on the brakes. Any additional braking should be done
intermittently, not continuously.
Brake booster
The brake booster boosts the pressure which you generate with the brake pedal.
The necessary pressure is only generated when the engine is running.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
128
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Intelligent Technology 129
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary.
• The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater
physical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because
if you do not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.
Antilock brake system (ABS)*
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking.
General
The ABS contributes significantly to enhancing the active safety of your vehicle.
Compared to a car not fitted with the ABS brake system, you are able to retain
optimal steering ability even during a full brake application on a slippery road
surface because the wheels do not lock up.
You must not expect, however, that the braking distance will be shorter under all
circumstances as a result of the ABS. The braking distance for example on gravel
and fresh snow, when you should anyway be driving slowly and cautiously, will be
longer.
Operating principle
As soon as the vehicle speed has increased to about 20 km/hour an automatic test
procedure is conducted during which you will be able to hear a pumping noise for
about 1 second.
The brake pressure will be reduced on a wheel which is rotating at a speed which is
too low for the speed of the vehicle and tending to lock. This control cycle is notice-
able from a pulsating movement of the brake pedal which is accompanied by
noises. This is consciously intended to provide the driver with the information that
the wheels are tending to lock (ABS control range). You must always keep the brake
pedal depressed to enable the ABS to optimally control the brake application in this
braking range. Never interrupt the application of the brakes!
WARNING
• The ABS can also not overcome the physical limits of your vehicle. Please
do not forget this, particularly when driving on icy or wet road surfaces. If the
ABS is operating within the control range, adapt your speed immediately to
the conditions of the road surface and the traffic situation. The increased
safety offered by the ABS must not tempt you to take greater risks than
otherwise - risk of an accident!
• The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an ABS fault.
Visit a specialist garage as quickly as possible and adjust your style of driving
to take account of the ABS fault in the meantime since you will not know how
great the damage is.
Note
• A warning light comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system ⇒ page 26.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other assign-
ment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ABS ⇒ page 171,
“Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Brake Assist*
During a severe brake application (e.g. if a hazard exists), the Brake Assist increases
the braking force and thus makes it possible to rapidly produce the pressure
required in the brake system.
The majority of drivers do apply the brakes in good time in dangerous situations,
but do not depress the brake pedal with sufficient pressure. Consequently, it is not
possible for the car to achieve its maximum deceleration and the car covers a
greater distance than necessary.
The Brake Assist is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. In such
cases, a much greater braking pressure exists than during a normal brake applica-
tion. This makes it possible, even with a relatively low resistance of the brake pedal,
to produce an adequate pressure in the brake system in the shortest possible time,
which is required for maximum deceleration of the car. You must apply the brake
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
129
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Intelligent Technology130
pedal firmly and hold it in this position in order to achieve the shortest possible
braking distance.
The Brake Assist is able to help you achieve a shorter braking distance in emergency
situations by rapidly producing the pressure required in the brake system. It fully
exploits the attributes of the ABS. After you release the brake pedal, the function of
the Brake Assist is automatically switched off and the brakes operate in the normal
way.
The Brake Assist is part of the ESP system. If a fault occurs in the ESP, the Brake Assist
function is also not available. Further information on the ESP ⇒ page 125.
WARNING
• The Brake Assist is also not able to overcome the physical limits of your
car in terms of the braking distance required.
• Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic
situation.
• The increased safety offered by the Brake Assist must not tempt you to
take a greater safety risk than otherwise.
Power steering*
The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force.
The steering characteristics can be changed by a specialist garage.
You will place great stresses on the power steering system if the steering is turned
to full lock when the vehicle is stationary. Turning the steering to full lock in such a
situation will be accompanied by noises.
It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the engine
is not running (vehicle being towed in). The only difference is that greater physical
effort is required.
It is possible that the hydraulic pump of the power steering will not run due to the
low vehicle network voltage if the battery has gone flat and the engine must started
with the help off jump leads. This condition will be indicated by lighting up of the
warning light.
The power steering operates again if the battery is charged to a specific range when
engine is running. It also operates again, if the engine can be started with its own
battery.
Caution
Do not leave the steering at full lock for more than 15 seconds when the engine is
running - risk of damaging the power steering!
Note
Have the steering inspected as soon as possible by a specialist garage if there is a
leak or fault in the system.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
130
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Driving and the Environment 131
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Driving and the Environment
The first 1 500 kilometres and then afterwards
A new engine
The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres.
Up to 1 000 kilometres
– Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the mamimum speed of the gear in use,
that is 3/4 of the maximum permissible engine speed.
– Do not use full throttle.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1 000 up to 1 500 kilometres
– Increase the power output of the engine gradually up to the full
speed of the gear engaged, that is up to the maximum permissible
engine revolutions.
During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later
until all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which you adopt
during the first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of
running in your car.
You should not drive at unnecessarily high engine revolutions even after the
running-in period is complete. The maximum permissible engine speed is marked
by the beginning of the red zone on the scale of the revolutions counter. Shift up
into the next higher gear on a vehicle fitted with manual gearbox before the red
zone is reached. Extremely high engine revolutions are automatically governed, by
the way.
For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situation also applies: Do
not drive at engine revolutions which are too low. Shift down as soon as the engine
is no longer running smoothly.
Caution
All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its
normal operating temperature. Never rev up an engine which is cold, neither when
the vehicle is stationary nor when driving in individual gears.
For the sake of the environment
Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a higher gear as
early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption and operating noise levels
and protects the environment.
New tyres
New tyres have to be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first. You should
take account of this fact for the first 500 kilometres and drive particularly carefully.
New brake pads
Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking efficiency
until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first “run in” before
they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however, compensate for this
slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pressure on the brake pedal.
This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future date.
During the running-in period, you should avoid excessive stresses on the brakes.
This includes, for example, violent braking, particularly from very high speeds, and
also when crossing mountain passes.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
131
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Driving and the Environment132
Catalytic converter
Proper operation of the emission control system (catalytic converter)
is of major significance for driving your vehicle in an environmen-
tally conscious way.
Please refer to the following guidelines:
– For vehicles with petrol engine only refuel with unleaded petrol
⇒ page 148, “Grades of petrol”.
– Never run the fuel tank completely empty.
– Do not switch off the ignition while you are driving the vehicle.
– Do not pour too much oil into the engine ⇒ page 156, “Replenishing
engine oil”.
– Do not tow-start the vehicle over a distance of more than 50 metres
⇒ page 183, “Tow-starting a vehicle”.
If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not available, you
must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the vehicle into a
country in which use of a catalytic converter is mandatory.
WARNING
• In view of the high temperatures which may be produced in the catalytic
converter, one should always park a vehicle in such a way that the catalytic
converter cannot come into contact with easily flammable materials below
the vehicle - a risk of fire!
• Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection
agents for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat shields. Such
substances might ignite when driving - risk of fire!
Caution
• Vehicles fitted with catalytic converter should never be allowed to let the fuel
tank to run completely empty. An irregular fuel supply can result in poor ignition or
misfiring. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic
converter.
• Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic
converter being destroyed.
• If you detect misfiring, a drop in performance or irregular engine running when
driving, reduce your speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected by the
nearest specialist garage. The symptoms described may be caused by a fault in the
ignition system. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the
catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even if the exhaust system is operating properly, a sulphur-like exhaust odour may
be produced under certain operating conditions of the engine. This depends on the
sulphur content of the fuel. It is often sufficient to refuel with unleaded premium-
grade petrol of a different brand or at a different filling station.
Driving in an economical and environmentally
conscious manner
General
Your personal style of driving is a major factor.
Your fuel consumption, any pollution of the environmental and the wear-and-tear
to the engine, brakes and tyres, depend essentially on three factors:
• your personal style of driving,
• the conditions under which your vehicle is operated,
• technical aspects.
You can easily improve your fuel economy by 10 - 15 percent by driving in an
economical way with foresight. This section is intended to provide you with a
number of tips on how to protect the environment and at the same time save
money.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
132
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Driving and the Environment 133
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The fuel consumption can naturally also be influenced by factors which are beyond
the driver's control. It is, for example, normal for the fuel consumption to increase
in winter and under worsened conditions such as poor road conditions, towing a
trailer, etc.
The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the
vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works. Special attention has
been given to minimising negative effects on the environment. It is necessary to
take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these
characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness.
Looking ahead when driving
A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs it accelerates.
Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily. If you drive with forsight you will not
need to brake so often and will also then not have to accelerate so much. Let your
vehicle coast to a stop, for example, if this is possible, when you see that the next
set of traffic lights is at red.
Shifting gears and saving energy
Shifting up early saves on fuel.
Manual gearbox
– Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear.
Always shift up into the next higher gear at approx. 2 000 to 2 500 revs.
Automatic gearbox
– Depress the accelerator pedal slowly. Do not depress it beyond the
kickdown position, however.
An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early. You will
consume more fuel if you drive at unnecessarily high revolutions in any given gear.
The ⇒ fig. 132 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle in
the relevant gears. Fuel consumption in 1st gear is the highest, while that in 5th or
the 6th gear is the lowest.
Only depress the accelerator pedal slowly if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic
gearbox in order to automatically select an economic driving programme. You will
achieve good fuel economy by shifting up early and shifting down late.
Note
Also use the information supplied by the multi-functional indicator* ⇒ page 13.
Avoiding full throttle
Driving more slowly means saving fuel.
Fig. 132 Fuel consump-
tion in litres/100 km. and
speed in km/h.
Fig. 133 Fuel consump-
tion in litres/100 km. and
speed in km/h.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
133
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Driving and the Environment134
Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consumption
but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehicle.
You should avoid fully exploiting the top speed of your vehicle wherever possible.
Fuel consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportion-
ally at high speeds.
The ⇒ page 133, fig. 133 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your
vehicle. You will cut your fuel consumption by half if you only make use three-quar-
ters of the possible top speed of your vehicle.
Reducing idling
Idling also costs fuel.
It is worthwhile switching off the engine in a traffic jam or when waiting at a level
crossing or at traffic lights with a lengthy red phase. Even after just 30 - 40 seconds
you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up
again.
If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating
temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though, are particularly high
in the warming-up phase. This is why you should drive off right after starting the
engine. Do avoid high engine revolutions at this time, however.
Regular servicing
A poorly tuned engine consumes an unnecessarily high amount of
fuel.
Having your vehicle serviced regularly at a specialist garge enables you to satisfy
one of the requirements for economical motoring even before you set off on your
journey. Keeping your vehicle properly serviced not only has a positive effect on the
safety of your vehicle and maintaining its value, but also saves on fuel.
A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10% higher than
normal.
The foreseen maintenance work should be undertaken exactly according to the
Service schedule by a specialist garage.
Also check the oil level after refueling. Oil consumption is dependent to a consid-
erable extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil consumption could be as
high as 0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style of driving.
It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first, and
reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time. It is therefore not
possible to correctly assess the oil consumption of a new vehicle until after you
have driven about 5 000 km.
For the sake of the environment
• You can achieve additional improvements in your fuel economy by using high-
lubricity oils.
• Check the ground below your car at regular intervals to detect any leakages in
good time. Please have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garge if you find any
stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor.
Avoid driving short distances
Short distances result in an above-average high fuel consumption.
– Avoid driving a distance of no more than 4 km if the engine is cold.
The engine and catalytic converter must first have reached their optimal operating
temperature in order to effectively reduce fuel consumption and pollutant emis-
sions.
Fig. 134 Fuel consump-
tion in litres/100 km at
different temperatures
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
134
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Driving and the Environment 135
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The cold engine vehicle consumes approx. 15 - 20 litres/100 km of fuel immediately
after starting. Fuel consumption drops to 10 litres/100 km after just 1 kilometre. The
engine reaches its operating temperature (outside temperature and engine
dependent) only after about 4 to 10 kilometres and the fuel consumption then
stabilizes. You should therefore avoid driving short distances whenever possible.
An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature. The
⇒ page 134, fig. 134 shows the different fuel consumptions for the same distance,
on the one hand at +20°C and on the other hand at -10°C. Your vehicle has a higher
fuel consumption in winter than in summer.
Checking tyre inflation pressures
Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel.
Always ensure that your tyres are inflated to the correct pressure at all times. The
rolling resistance will be increased if the tyre filling pressure is too low. This will not
only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will
worsen.
Always check the inflation pressure of the tyres when cold.
Do not drive with winter tyres all year round for this costs about 10 % more fuel.
Winter tyres are also louder.
No unnecessary ballast
Transporting ballast costs fuel.
The fact that every kilogram of extra weight increases your fuel consumption
means that it is worth taking a look in the luggage compartment to avoid trans-
porting any unnecessary ballast.
It is particularly in town traffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that the vehicle
weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption. A rule of thumb
here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel
consumption of about 1 litre/100 kilometres.
You may frequently also leave a roof rack fitted on just out of convenience,
although you no longer need it. The increased aerodynamic drag of your vehicle
causes it to use about 1 l more fuel than normal at a speed of 100 - 120 km/h, even
when you are not carrying a load on the roof.
Saving electricity
Generating electricity costs fuel.
– Switch off electrical components as soon as you no longer need them.
When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies electrical power.
The greater the load on the alternator as a result of having a large number of elec-
trical components switched on, the more fuel will be consumed for operating the
alternator.
Keeping a log of your fuel consumption
If you really wish to keep a close check on your fuel consumption, it is best to enter
the figures in a logbook. This does not take much time but is a very worthwhile exer-
cise. It enables you to detect any change (positive and negative) at an early stage
and to take any appropriate action.
If you find that your fuel consumption is too high, you should reflect on how, where
and in what conditions you have driven the vehicle since you last refuelled.
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, selection of mate-
rials and manufacture of your new Škoda. Particular emphasis has been paid to a
number of aspects, including:
Design measures
• joints designed to be easily detached
• simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system
• improved purity of different classes of materials
• Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
135
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Driving and the Environment136
• Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO
2
• Minimum fuel leakage during accidents
• Reduced noise
Choice of materials
• extensive use of recyclable material
• Air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant
• no cadmium
• no asbestos
• Reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics
Manufacture
• solvent-free cavity protection
• solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production
plant to the customer
• The use of solvent-free adhesives
• No CFCs used in the production process
• without use of mercury
• Use of water-soluble paints
Trade-in and recycling of old cars
Škoda Auto meets the requirements of the brand and its products regarding envi-
ronment and ressource protection. All new Škoda vehicles can be utilized up to
95 % and always
4)
be returned. In a lot of countries sufficient trade-in networks
have been created, where you can trade-in your vehicle. After you trade-in your
vehicle, you will receive a confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with
environmental regulations.
Vehicles with special built-on types
Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept by
the vehicle user, in order to hand over later to the old car user. This ensures the
recycling in accordance with environmental regulations.
Note
Detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old cars is available from
your Škoda Service Partner.
Motoring abroad
General
Other circumstances may exist abroad.
It is also possible, in certain countries, that the Škoda Service Partner network is
limited or has not been established yet. This is the reason why obtaining certain
spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garage personnel may
only be able to make limited repairs. Škoda Auto a.s. in the Czech Republic and rele-
vant importers are happy to provide information about technical aspects of the
vehicle, required maintenance work and possibilities for getting repairs done.
Unleaded petrol
A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol
⇒ page 132. The automobile associations can provide you with information
regarding the locations of filling stations which offer unleaded petrol.
Headlights
The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side of the
road on which you are driving to a greater extent. If you drive abroad on the other
side of the road, you will dazzle oncoming traffic.
It is necessary in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic to stick a sticker over a
certain part of the headlights.
Headlight stickers can be obtained as a spare part from the Skoda Service Partners.
Headlights with Xenon lamps are designed for driving in countries with traffic on
the right or on the left. Have this done always at a Škoda Service Partner.
4)
subject to fulfilment of the national legal regulations
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
136
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Driving and the Environment 137
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
You can obtain further information regarding masking over or converting the head-
lights from your Škoda Service Partner.
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
When driving on poor roads and lanes or when driving over kerbstones, steep
ramps etc., you must pay particular attention to ensuring that any low-slung parts
of the vehicle, such as spoiler and exhaust, do not touch the ground and get
damaged.
This particularly applies to models with a lowered suspension (sport suspension)
and also when your vehicle is fully laden.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
137
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Towing a trailer138
Towing a trailer
Towing a trailer
Technical requirements
The towing device must satisfy certain technical requirements.
Your vehicle is designed primarily for transporting persons and luggage. It can,
however, also be used for towing a trailer - provided certain technical equipment is
fitted.
If your vehicle has already been supplied with a factory-fitted towing device then
everything that is necessary for towing a trailer in technical terms, and in terms of
the law, has already been taken into account.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power socket for the electrical connection
between the vehicle and trailer. If the trailer which you wish to tow has a 7-pin
connector, you can use a suitable adapter
5)
from Škoda original accessories.
This work must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications
if a towing device is retrofitted.
Škoda Service Partners are familiar with details relating to retrofitting a towing
device and for any necessary modifications to the cooling system.
WARNING
We recommend that you have the towing device from Škoda original acces-
sories installed by a Škoda Service Partner. He is familiar with all the relevant
details relating to retrofitting such equipment. There is a risk of an accident
if the towing device is not properly fitted!
General Maintenance
There are a number of points to pay attention to when towing a
trailer.
Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must on no account be exceeded.
You can negotiate appropriately steeper inclines and descents if you do not make
full use of the permissible trailer load.
The trailer loads specified only apply for altitudes up to 1 000 metres above mean
sea level. The fact that the engine power output drops with increasing height due to
a lowering of air pressure and thus the ability to climb, means that the towed weight
must be reduced by 10% for every further increase of 1 000 metres in height above
sea level. The towed weight is the weight of the (laden) vehicle and the (laden)
trailer together. One should take this into account before driving up to higher alti-
tudes.
The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing
device are merely test data for the towing device The data relating to your
vehicle, which is often less than this test data, can be found in your vehicle
registration documents.
Distribution of the load
Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that any heavy items are located as
close as possible to the axle. Secure the items to prevent them slipping.
Tyre pressure
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for that of “fully laden”,
⇒ page 165. The inflation pressure of the tyres fitted to the trailer adjust in accord-
ance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
Exterior mirrors
You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the
traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. Both exterior mirrors
5)
In some countries the adapter is supplied with the towing device.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
138
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Towing a trailer 139
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
should be attached to folding arms. Adjust the mirrors so that they provide you with
an adequate field of view to the rear.
Headlights
Before starting off with a hitched trailer, also check the setting of the headlights.
Alter the setting as necessary with the aid of the headlight beam adjuster
⇒ page 44.
Detachable ball head
The ball rod is detachable on vehicles which feature a factory-fitted towing device.
It is stowed together with separate fitting instructions in the spare wheel well in the
luggage compartment of the vehicle.
Further information on the towing device ⇒ page 140.
Note
• We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected between service
intervals if you tow a trailer frequently.
• The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and
decoupling the trailer.
Driving Tips
Particular caution is required when towing a trailer.
– Do not, as far as possible, drive with your vehicle unladen and the
trailer laden.
– Do not make full use of the legal maximum speeds. This applies in
particular to downhill sections.
– Apply the brakes in good time.
– Keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if the outside temper-
ature is high.
Distribution of weight
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer
is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this
combination.
Driving speed
Do not drive faster than 80 km/hour for safety reasons. This also applies for coun-
tries in which higher speeds are allowed.
The fact that the driving stability of the vehicle + trailer combination reduces with
increasing speed means that the legally allowed speed should not be used when
there are unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions, particularly near accident
black spots.
You must always reduce your speed immediately as soon as you detect even just
the slightest swaying of the trailer. On no account attempt to stop the trailer from
“swaying” by accelerating.
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting from
the trailer wheels locking. Shift down gears in good time before negotiating a down-
hill section to allow the engine to also act as a brake.
Engine overheating
Please keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if you have to negotiate a
lengthy slope in a low gear at a high engine speed when the outside temperature is
very high ⇒ page 10.
If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right-hand area or
even the red area of the scale, reduce your speed immediately. Stop and switch off
the engine if the warning light in the instrument cluster begins flashing. Wait a
few minutes and check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle
⇒ page 157, “Inspecting the coolant level”.
Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ page 23, “Coolant temperature/coolant
level ”.
The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.
Any increase in the cooling effect of the coolant fan through shifting down a gear
and increasing the engine speed is not possible since the fan speed is independent
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
139
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Towing a trailer140
of the engine speed. One should also not drop a gear for this reason when towing
a trailer as long as the engine can manage the slope without any drop in speed.
Detachable towing device*
The detachable ball head of the towing device is stowed in the spare wheel well in
the luggage compartment.
An instruction for correct installation and removal of the ball head of the towing
device is supplied with the ball head
Inspect the ball head to ensure that it is properly locked each time before setting off.
The inspection is performed by turning the closed locking lever downwards. If the
locking lever can only be turned around a small angle (approx. 5°), the locking
mechanism is O.K. After the inspection pull the locking lever back again to its stop.
The towing device must not be used, if it does not wish to close or the locking lever
turns slightly in the closed position.
WARNING
Do not use any aids or tools for installing or removing the ball head. This
might result in damage to the locking mechanism to the extent that the
safety of the towing device is no longer assured - risk of an accident.
Note
• Do not carry out any modifications or repairs to the ball head or to any other
components on the towing device.
• Contact a specialist garage if you encounter any problems using the device.
• Never unlock the ball head with a trailer coupled to it.
• You should take off the ball head if you drive without towing a trailer. Inspect
whether the end cover properly seals off the mounting shaft.
• Remove the ball head beforehand if you wish to clean your vehicle using a
steam jet. Ensure that the end cover properly seals the mounting shaft.
• It is recommended to wear gloves when installing and removing.
Fig. 135 Detachable ball
head
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
140
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 141
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
General Maintenance
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle
General
Proper care retains the value of your vehicle.
Regular and proper care retains the value of your vehicle. It may also be one of the
requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relating to corrosion damage
and paint defects on the bodywork.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer. Please follow the instructions for use on the package.
WARNING
• Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the
instructions.
• Always store care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children -
risk of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
• Always select environmentally-friendly products when purchasing vehicle care
products.
• Do not dispose of residues of care products in domestic waste.
Care of the exterior of vehicle
Washing the vehicle
Frequent washing protects your vehicle.
The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is
frequent washing and wax treatment. How often you should wash your vehicle
depends on a wide range of factors, such as:
• Frequency of use,
• The parking situation (garage, below trees etc.),
• Season of the year,
• Weather conditions,
• Environmental influences.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust, tar,
soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paint-
work of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect can be. High
temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, accentuate this caustic
effect.
It may therefore be necessary, in certain circumstances, to wash the car once a
week. It may also be sufficient, however, to wash the car once a month followed
by appropriate wax treatment.
It is essential to also thoroughly wash the underside of your vehicle at the end of
the winter road salting and gritting period.
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the brake system
can affect the braking efficiency - risk of accident!
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
141
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle142
Automatic vehicle wash systems
The paintwork of the vehicle is sufficiently resistant that the vehicle can be washed
normally in automatic vehicle wash plants without any problem. The actual stress
to which the paintwork is subjected, however, depends greatly on the design of the
vehicle wash system, the filtering of the water and the type of washing and care
products used. If the paintwork of your vehicle appears mat after being washed or
even has scratches, point this out to the operator of the vehicle wash plant. Use a
different vehicle wash plant, if necessary.
There are no particular points to note before washing your vehicle in such a plant
other than the usual precautionary measures (closing windows and sliding/tilting
roof, moving any factory-fitted aerials down flat against the bodywork, etc.).
If you have any particular attached parts fitted to your car - such as spoiler, roof rack
system, two-way radio aerial - it is best to first of all consult the operator of the car
wash plant.
It is important to degrease the lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers after passing
through the automatic vehicle wash system.
Caution
Do not screw the swivelling down roof aerial tight before washing the vehicle in an
automatic vehicle wash system - risk of damage!
Washing vehicle by hand
It is important to first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off as thor-
oughly as possible before washing your vehicle by hand.
One should then clean the vehicle using a soft washing sponge, washing glove or
a washing brush and only slight pressure. Work from the top to the bottom -
beginning with the roof. Only place slight pressure on the vehicle paintwork during
cleaning Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt.
Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such areas.
Rinse off the vehicle well after giving it a wash and dry it off using a chamois leather.
WARNING
• The ignition should always be switched off when you wash your vehicle -
risk of accident!
• Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when you
are cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel
trims - risk of cuts.
Caution
• Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight - risk of paint damage.
• Ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locks or at the door and
panel joints if you spray your vehicle in winter down with a hose - risk of freezing.
• Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning prod-
ucts - risk of damage to the surface of paintwork.
For the sake of the environment
Only wash your vehicle at washing bays specifically reserved for this purpose. This
ensures that no water which may be contaminated by oil flows into the sewage
system. It is not even permitted to wash your vehicle in certain areas except at such
specific washing bays.
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
When you wash your vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, it is essential to comply
with the instructions for use of the cleaning equipment. This applies in particular to
the pressure used and to the spraying distance. Maintain a sufficiently large
distance to soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
On no account use circular spray nozzles or so-called dirt cutters!
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
142
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 143
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
It is particularly important that you do not clean tyres with circular spray
jets. Damage may occur even at a relatively large spraying distance and if
sprayed only for a short time.
Caution
The water containing wax must be no hotter than 60°C, otherwise the vehicle can
be damaged.
Wax treatment
Good wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful
environmental influences and minor mechanical damage.
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest, when
no more drops form on the clean paintwork.
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean bodywork
after it has dried thoroughly. Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still
recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with
hard wax.
Caution
Never apply wax to the windows.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary if the paintwork of your vehicle has become unattractive
and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservers.
You must treat the paintwork with a wax preserver if the polish you use does not
contain any preserving elements ⇒ page 143, “Wax treatment”.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer.
Caution
• You must not treat mat painted parts or plastic with polishing products or hard
wax.
• Do not polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment, otherwise
the paintwork can be scratched.
Chrome parts
First clean the chrome parts with a damp clotch and then polish them with a soft,
dry cloth. If it does not prove to be adequate, use a chrome care product from
Škoda original accessories.
Caution
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment, otherwise they can be
scratched.
Paint damage
Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches, scuffs or traces of chip damage must
be treated immediately before any corrosion can result. You can of course have this
work carried out by a Škoda Service Partner.
Škoda Service Partners have a range of matching touch-up pens or spray cans
available in the colour of your vehicle.
The paint number of the original paintwork of your vehicle is indicated on the
vehicle data sticker ⇒ page 197, fig. 184.
Any corrosion which has already have formed must be removed thoroughly. Apply
a corrosion protection primer and then the paint to the affected point. You can of
course have this work carried out by a Škoda Service Partner.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
143
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle144
Plastic parts
External plastic parts are cleaned by normal washing. Plastic parts and synthetic
leather can also be treated with special solvent-free plastic cleaning agents if a
damp cloth is not sufficient. Paint care products are not suitable for plastic parts.
Caution
Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.
Windows
Only use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and
mirrors. You should not move the ice scraper forward and backward but in one
direction on the window which you are cleaning in order to avoid any damage to
the surface of the glass.
You can best remove residues of rubber, oil, grease, wax or silicone by using a
special window cleaner or a special silicone remover.
You should also clean the windows regularly from the inside.
Do not use window leathers which you have used to polish the vehicle body to dry
off the windows. Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dirty the
window and reduce visibility.
Do not affix any stickers over the inside of the rear window to avoid damage to the
heating elements of the rear window heater.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer.
Caution
Never remove snow or ice from the glass parts with warm or hot water - risk of
formation of cracks in the glass!
The headlight lenses
Please do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products - risk of
damage to the plastic lenses Please use soap and clean warm water.
Caution
Never wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects for cleaning the
plastic lenses, this may result in damage to the protective paintwork and conse-
quently in formation of cracks on the headlight lenses, e.g through effect of chem-
ical products.
Door and window seals
The rubber seals on the doors, boot lid, bonnet and windows remain supple and
last longer if you treat them from time to time with a rubber care product (e.g. with
a spray with silicone-free oil). You also avoid premature wear of the seals and
prevent leakages in this way. It is also easier to open the doors. Rubber seals which
are well cared for also do not stick together in cold winter weather.
Locks
We recommend that you use the spray from Škoda original accessories with
regreasing and anticorrosive effect for de-icing locks.
Note
When washing your vehicle, ensure that as little water as possible gets into the
locks.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
144
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 145
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Wheels
Steel wheels
You should also thoroughly wash the wheels and wheel trims when giving your
vehicle its regular wash. This prevents any brake dust, dirt and road salt from
sticking to the wheel hubs. You can remove stubborn brake abrasion adhering to
the wheels with an industrial cleaner. Touch up any damage to the paintwork on the
wheels before rust is able to form.
Light alloy wheels
Regular care of light alloy wheels is necessary in order to retain their decorative
appearance over long periods. It is particularly important to remove any road salt
and brake abrasion from light alloy wheels every two weeks, otherwise the surface
will suffer. Wash thoroughly and then treat the wheels with a protective product for
light alloy wheels which does not contain any acidic components. You should
provide the wheel hubs with a hard wax layer every three months. You must not use
any products which cause abrasion when treating the wheel hubs. Any damage to
the paint layer on the wheel hubs must be touched up immediately.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer.
WARNING
One should remember when cleaning the wheels that moisture, ice and road
salt may adversely affect braking efficiency - risk of an accident!
Note
Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This may
show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering
wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of the steering.
This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.
Underbody protection
The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechanical
influences.
One cannot, however, completely rule out damage to the protective layer when
driving so we recommend that you inspect the protective layer on the underside of
your vehicle and on the chassis at certain intervals - this is best done at the begin-
ning and end of the winter - and to touch up any damaged areas.
Škoda Service Partners have suitable spray products available as well as the neces-
sary equipment and are familiar with the instructions for use. We therefore recom-
mend to have repairs and additional corrosion protection measures preferably
carried out by a Škoda Service Partner.
WARNING
Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents
for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat shields. When the engine
reaches its operating temperature, these substances might ignite - risk of
fire!
Protection of hollow spaces
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life
by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re-treated. Please remove
any small amount of wax which flows out of the cavities at high temperatures with
a plastic scraper and clean the spot using petroleum cleaner.
WARNING
Safety and environmental protection regulations should observed when
using petroleum cleaner to remove wax - a risk of fire!
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
145
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle146
Engine compartment
Good corrosion protection is very important, particularly in winter when one often
drives over its salt-strewn roads. One should therefore clean the entire engine
compartment before and after the salt spreading period, in order to prevent the salt
from being destructive.
Škoda Service Partners have the cleaning agents recommended by the manufac-
turer and also the required equipment.
WARNING
• It is necessary to observe the guidelines given in the chapter before
working on the engine compartment ⇒ page 152.
• Let the engine cool down before cleaning the engine compartment.
Caution
• Engine cleaning may be only be undertaken when the ignition is off.
• It is recommended to cover the generator before washing the engine compart-
ment.
For the sake of the environment
The dirty water produced by washing the engine has washed away petrol, and resi-
dues of grease and oil and should therefore be cleaned by an oil separator. This is
why engine washing should only be undertaken in a garage or at a fueling station
(when these are fitted with the required equipment).
Care of the interior of vehicle
Plastic parts, artificial leather and cloths
You can clean plastic parts and artificial leather with a moist cloth. You should only
treat such parts with special solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products it
does prove to be adequate.
Upholstery cloth and cloth trim on the doors, luggage compartment cover, head-
liner etc. are best treated with special cleaning products, using if necessary a dry
foam and a soft sponge or brush.
We recommend using a cleaning product from Škoda genuine accessories offered
by your Škoda dealer.
Caution
Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.
Fabric covers of electrically heated seats
Do not clean the seat covers moist as this may result in damage to the seat heating
system.
Clean such covers using special agents, for example dry foam.
Natural leather
Natural leather requires quite particular care and attention.
Leather should be treated from time to time according the following
guidelines depending on how much it is used.
Normal cleaning
– Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened cotton or
woollen cloth.
Severe soiling
– Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth dipped in a mild soapy solu-
tion (2 spoonfuls of natural soap to 1 litre of water).
– Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and that no
water gets into the stitching of the seams.
– Dry off the leather with a soft, dry cloth.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
146
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 147
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Removing stains
– Remove fresh stains which are water-based (e.g. coffee, tea, juices,
blood etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household paper or use the
cleaner from the care set for a stain which has already dried in.
– Remove fresh stains on a fat base (e.g. butter, mayonnaise, chocolate
etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household cleaning paper or with the
cleaner from the care set if the stain has not yet penetrated into the
surface.
– Use a grease dissolver for grease stains which have dried in.
–Eliminate special stains (e.g. ball-point pens, felt pen, nail varnish,
dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.) with a special stain remover suit-
able for leather.
Leather care
– Treat the leather every six months with the leather care product avail-
able from Škoda Service Partners.
– Apply only a small amount of the care product.
– Dry the leather off with a soft cloth
We recommend that you consult your Škoda Service Partner, if you have any ques-
tions regarding cleaning and care of the leather interior.
Caution
• You must on no account treat the leather with solvents (e.g. gasoline, turpen-
tine), floor wax, shoe cream or such like.
• Avoid leaving your vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight in order to
avoid bleaching the leather. If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy
periods, protect the leather from the direct rays of the sun by covering it over.
• Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharp-
edged belts may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface.
Note
• Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect regularly and each
time after cleaning the leather. The cream nourishes the leather, allows it to breathe
and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also creates surface protection.
• Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months, remove fresh soiling each time this
occurs.
• Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe
cream etc., as quickly as possible.
• Care also for the leather dye. Refreshen areas which have lost their colour with
a special coloured leather cream as required.
Seat belts
– Keep the seat belts clean!
– Wash seat belts which have become soiled using a mild soapy solu-
tion.
– Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition.
Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia reel from
reeling up the belt properly.
WARNING
• The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.
• Never clean the seat belts chemically as dry cleaning may destroy the
fabric. The seat belts must also not be allowed to come into contact with
corrosive liquids (such as acids etc.).
• We recommend that seat belts which have damage to the webbing, the
connections, the inertia reel or the lock should be replaced by a Škoda
Service Partner.
• Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled up.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
147
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuel148
Fuel
Petrol
Grades of petrol
There are various grades of petrol. Please read ⇒ page 197, “Technical Data” in
order to know which grade of petrol your vehicle requires. You will also find the
same information affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap of your vehicle
⇒ page 149, fig. 137.
A distinction is made between unleaded and leaded petrol. All Škoda vehicles with
petrol engines are equipped with a catalytic converter and must therefore be only
driven with unleaded petrol. Unleaded petrol complies with the standard
DINEN228.
The individual grades of petrol are distinguished by their octane number (RON).
Please adopt the following procedure if the grade of petrol which you normally use
is not be available in exceptional circumstances:
• Engines which need unleaded premium petrol 95 RON can also be run on
unleaded regular petrol 91 RON. This does, however, result in a slight loss in
performance.
• Engines which need unleaded premium plus petrol 98 RON can also be run
on unleaded regular petrol 95 RON. This does, however, result in a slight loss in
performance. You can in exceptional circumstances also use unleaded regular
petrol of 91 RON in the event that neither unleaded premium petrol of 98 RON nor
95 RON is available. Refuel as soon as possible with unleaded premium plus of 98
RON or unleaded premium petrol of 95 RON.
If, in an emergency, the only fuel available is one which has a lower octane number
than that required by the engine then only drive at medium engine speeds and
lower engine loadings.
You can make unlimited use of fuel which has a higher octane number than that
required by the engine. There will, however, be no advantages gained by this in
terms of engine performance and fuel consumption!
The handling, performance and life of your engine are determined to a significant
extent by the quality of the fuel. Do not use any petrol additives. Use a fuel
complying with the standard.
You can find further information on refuelling ⇒ page 149.
Caution
• Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic
converter being destroyed.
• Operating the engine with petrol of a low octane number than that required can
result in engine damage at high revolutions or severe engine loading.
Diesel
Grades of diesel
Grades of diesel fuel
Your vehicle can be driven with the following grades of diesel fuel:
Diesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 590.
Fuel additives
You must not use fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar
products) in diesel fuel.
If the quality of the diesel fuel is poor, it is then necessary to drain the fuel filter
more often than stated in the Service schedule.
You can find information on refuelling ⇒ page 149, “Refuelling”.
Caution
• Use a fuel complying with the standard. Filling the tank even only once, which
does not comply with the standard, can result in damage to the fuel system.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
148
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuel 149
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Water which has collected in the fuel filter can result in engine problems.
Operation in winter
Winter-grade diesel fuel
A different grade of diesel fuel is available at filling stations in winter than during the
summer. Using “summer-grade diesel fuel” at temperatures below 0°C can result in
operational problems because the diesel becomes viscous as a result of paraffin
separation.
It is therefore the case that DIN EN 590 prescribes diesel fuel class for certain
periods of the year which can also be purchased at the corresponding time during
the year. “Winter-grade diesel fuel” will still operate properly even at a temperature
of -20°C.
It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels
available have a different temperature characteristic. Škoda Service Partners and
filling stations in the country concerned will be able to provide you with informa-
tion regarding the diesel fuels available.
Prewarming fuel
The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter prewarming system. This secures operation of
a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of -25°C.
Caution
It is not permitted to add the various fuel additives on the market, including petrol,
to diesel fuel in order to improve its flow properties.
Refuelling
Opening the fuel filler cap
– The fuel filler flap opens when you pull on the actuation lever* next to
the driver's seat ⇒ fig. 136 or open at fuel filler tube.
– The fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube must be unlocked to the left
using the vehicle key (only valid for vehicles which do not have remote
unlocking of the fuel filler flap next to the driver's seat).
– Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and place the fuel filler cap
from above on the fuel filler flap ⇒ fig. 137.
Fig. 136 Opening lever
for the fuel tank flap
Fig. 137 Fuel filler flap
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
149
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuel150
Closing fuel filler cap
– Screw on the cap by turning it to the right until it is heard to lock.
– The fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube must be locked to the right
using the vehicle key and the key then removed (only valid for vehicles
which do not have remote unlocking of the fuel filler flap next to the
driver's seat).
– Press the fuel tank flap closed.
The correct grades of fuel for your vehicle are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside
of the fuel filler flap. Further information on fuel ⇒ page 148.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 45 litres.
WARNING
Pay attention to any legal requirements if you do carry a spare canister in the
vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for
safety reasons. The canister can be damaged in the event of an accident and
fuel may leak out.
Caution
• Remove any fuel which has spilled onto the paintwork of your vehicle immedi-
ately. This particularly applies to biodiesel - risk of paint damage!
• Vehicles fitted with catalytic converter should never be allowed to let the fuel
tank to run completely empty. An irregular supply of fuel to the engine can result in
misfiring and unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system, which may result in
overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.
• Make sure that the valve is not pressed into the filler tube when inserting the
pump nozzle into the filler tube. Otherwise you are unintentionally filling up the
volume, which in case of heat can cause an expansion of the fuel. This can lead to
an overflow of fuel or damage to parts of the fuel reservoir.
• The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time,
provided the nozzle has been operated properly - otherwise the expansion volume
is filled up.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
150
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 151
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Inspecting and Replenishing
Engine compartment
Bonnet remote release
Bonnet remote release
– Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the driver's side
⇒ fig. 138.
The bonnet jumps out of its lock as a result of the spring force. A handle appears at
the same time in the radiator grille.
Opening and closing the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
– Unlock the bonnet ⇒ fig. 138.
– Ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place
against the windscreen before opening the bonnet otherwise
damage could occur to the paintwork.
– Pulling on the handle ⇒ fig. 139 will lock the bonnet fully.
Fig. 138 Bonnet release
lever
Fig. 139 Radiator grille:
handle
Fig. 140 Securing the
bonnet with the bonnet
support
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
151
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing152
– Grip with the hand under the radiator grille and lift up the bonnet.
– Take the bonnet support out of its holder and set it in the opening
designed for it ⇒ page 151, fig. 140.
Closing the bonnet
– Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support. Press the
bonnet support into the holder designed to hold it.
– Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of about 30 cm into the lock -
bonnet do not press down on it!
WARNING
• Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of
the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam
or coolant has stopped escaping.
• For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed when
driving. One should therefore check that the lock has in fact engaged prop-
erly after closing the bonnet.
• Stop your vehicle immediately while driving if you notice that the lock is
not properly engaged and close the bonnet properly - risk of an accident!
Caution
• Never open the bonnet using the handle - danger of causing damage.
• Before opening the bonnet, ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are
correctly in place against the windscreen. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the
paintwork.
Working in the engine compartment
Particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine
compartment!
There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the
engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. For
this reason, it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated
below and with the general applicable rules of safety. The engine compart-
ment of your car is a hazardous area ⇒ .
WARNING
• Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of
the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam
or coolant has stopped escaping.
• Switch off the engine and pull out the ignition key.
• Apply the handbrake firmly.
• If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever
into Neutral, or if it is fitted with automatic gearbox, move the selector lever
into position P.
• Allow the engine to cool down.
• Keep children clear of the engine compartment.
• Do not touch any hot engine parts - risk of burns!
• Never spill oil and other fluids over the hot engine. Such fluids (e.g. the
antifreeze contained in the coolant) may ignite!
• Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the battery.
• Never place your hand into the radiator fan as long as the engine is still
warm. The fan might suddenly start running!
• Never open the cap of the coolant expansion bottle as long as the engine
is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!
• Cover over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir with a large cloth
when opening it as protection for your face, hands and arms from hot steam
or hot coolant.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
152
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 153
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Do not let objects, such as e.g cleaning cloth or tools lie in the engine
compartment.
• If you wish to work under the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle from
rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks: the car jack is
not sufficient for this - risk of injury!
• In cases where it be necessary to carry out inspection work when the
engine is running there is an additional risk from rotating parts (e.g. the V-
ribbed belt, alternator, radiator fan) and from the high-voltage ignition
system. Please observe in addition the following:
− Never touch the electrical cables of the ignition system.
− Absolutely avoid any jewellery, loose items of clothing or long hair
from getting into the rotating parts of the engine - Hazard! Therefore
remove any jewellery beforehand, tie up your hair and wear tight fitting
clothing.
• Please also comply with the warning instructions stated below when
carrying out any essential work on the fuel system or on the electrical
system:
− Always separate the car battery from the electrical system.
− Do not smoke.
− Never carry out any work close to naked flames.
− Always keep a working fire extinguisher at hand.
Caution
When replenishing fluids in the engine, always ensure that the fluids are on no
account mixed up. This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle
damage!
Overview of the engine compartment
The main inspection points
Fig. 141 Diesel engine 1.9 litre/74 kW
Coolant expansion bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil filler opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery (below a cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and
diesel engines is practically identical.
WARNING (continued)
A
1
157
A
2
164
A
3
156
A
4
155
A
5
159
A
6
160
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
153
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing154
Engine oil
Engine oil specifications
The grade of engine oil should be selected in accordance with
precise specifications.
The engine of your vehicle has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil which you
can use throughout the year - except in extreme climatic regions.
You can mix various oils together with each other when refilling with oil. This does
not, however, apply for models with flexible service intervals (QG1).
Engine oils are, of course, undergoing continuous further development. Thus the
information stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publication.
Škoda Service Partners are informed by Škoda Auto a.s. about current changes. We
recommend having this oil change undertaken by a Škoda Service Partner.
Engine oil specifications for vehicles with fixed service intervals (QG0, QG2)
Engine oil specifications for models with flexible service intervals (QG1)
Caution
We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since this will
maintain the properties of the oil. In exceptional cases, you must top up only once
engine oil complying with Specification VW 502 00 (only for petrol engines) or
Specification VW 505 01 (only for diesel engines) to maximum 0.5 litres. You must
not use other engine oils - risk of engine damage!
Note
• Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you
engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle. Consequently,
you will always have the correct engine oil for refilling.
• We recommend using a preservative from the Škoda original accessories
offered by your Škoda dealer.
• For further information - see Service shedule.
Engine oil specifications
Petrol engines
VW 501 01
VW 502 00
VW 504 00
ACEA A2
a)
or A3
a)
a)
Only to be used in exceptional cases if the oils specified above are not available.
Diesel engines
VW 505 01
VW 505 00
b)
VW 507 00
b)
ACEA B3
a)
or ACEA B4
a)
b)
This does not apply for PDi engines (a unit injection engine). Further information in the
chapter ⇒ page 197, “Technical Data”.
Engine oil specifications
Petrol engines
VW 504 00
alternative VW 503 00
Diesel engines
VW 507 00
alternative VW 506 01
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
154
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 155
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Check engine oil level
The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine.
Checking the oil level
– Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ in “Working in the engine compartment” on
page 152.
– Wait a few minutes and pull out the oil dipstick ⇒ .
– Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again fully.
– Then withdraw the dipstick again and read off the oil level.
Oil level within range
– You must not top up the oil.
Oil level within range
– You may top up the oil. It is possible that the oil level may then be
within range after doing this.
Oil level within range
–You must top up the oil. It is sufficient, once this is done, to keep the
oil level is within range .
It is normal for the engine to consume oil. The oil consumption may be as much as
0.5 l/1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which
you operate your vehicle. The oil consumption may be slightly higher than this
during the first 5 000 kilometres.
One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably every time
after the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches.
We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range if the engine has been
operating at high loads, for example during a lengthy motorway trip during the
summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a high mountain pass, but not
above this.
The warning light in the instrument cluster* will indicate ⇒ page 24 whether the oil
level is too low. In this case, check the oil level as soon as possible. Top up with an
appropriate quantity of oil.
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 152, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
Caution
• Always check the oil level on vehicles with engine 1.2 l/47 kW when the engine
is warm. Otherwise the measuring result is incorrect und oil could be incorrectly
replenished - risk of engine damage!
• The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range . Danger of
damaging the catalytic converter.
• Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with oil. Switch the engine off and obtain profes-
sional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine
damage.
Fig. 142 Dipstick
A
A
A
a
A
b
A
a
A
c
A
b
A
b
A
a
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
155
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing156
Replenishing engine oil
– Inspect the oil level ⇒ page 155.
– Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening.
– Pour in a suitable grade of oil in portions of 0.5 litres ⇒ page 154,
“Engine oil specifications”.
– Inspect the oil level ⇒ page 155.
– Carefully screw on the cap of the filler opening and push the dipstick
in fully.
WARNING
• Avoid dripping oil onto hot parts of the engine when topping up will oil -
a risk of fire!
• Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 152, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must on no account be above the range ⇒ page 155. Oil will other-
wise be drawn in through the crankcase ventilation and may pass through the
exhaust system to atmosphere. The oil may combust in the catalytic converter and
damage it.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or
according to the service interval indicator ⇒ page 11.
WARNING
• Only carry out the engine oil change, if you have the required profes-
sional knowledge!
• Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 152, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
• Let the engine cool down - risk of burning from hot oil.
• Wear an eye protection - risk of caustic burns due to oil splashes.
• Oil is toxic! Store old oil in a safe place out of the reach of children and
unauthorized persons until you dispose of it properly.
Caution
You must not pour any additives into the engine oil - risk of engine damage!
Damage, which results from such product, are excluded from the warranty.
For the sake of the environment
• You must on no account pour oil into the ground or into the sewage system.
• In view of the problems involved in properly disposing of old oil, the material,
equipment and the knowledge required for such work, we recommend that you
have the oil and oil filter change carried out by your Škoda Service Partner.
Note
After your skin has come in contact with the oil, you must thoroughly wash your
skin.
Cooling system
Coolant
The job of the coolant is to cool the engine.
The cooling system does not require any maintenance under normal operating
conditions. The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive
of 40 %. This mixture not only provides antifreeze protection down to -25°C but
A
a
WARNING (continued)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
156
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 157
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
also protects the cooling and heating system from corrosion. It also prevents the
formation of scale and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant.
You must therefore not reduce the concentration of antifreeze agent in the coolant
by adding water, also not during the summer months or in countries with a warm
climate. The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must be at least
40%.
You can increase the amount of antifreeze in the coolant if a higher concentration
of antifreeze is necessary for climatic reasons but only up to 60% (antifreeze
protection down to approx. -40°C). The antifreeze protection tails off above that
concentration.
Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate (e.g. Sweden, Norway, Finland)
are already factory-filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to
about -35°C. In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at
least 50 %.
Coolant
The cooling system is filled at the works with coolant (purple in colour), which
complies with the specification TL-VW 774 F.
We recommend that you use the antifreeze agent - G12 PLUS (purple in colour).
We recommend that you contact your Škoda Service Partner if you have any ques-
tions regarding the coolant or if you wish to fill up with a different coolant.
Your Škoda Service Partner can also supply you with the correct coolant additives.
Caution
• Other coolant additives may cause operational problems which, in partic-
ular, involves significantly reducing the anticorrosion effect.
• Any faults or problems resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of
coolant and, as a consequence of this, result in major engine damage.
Inspecting the coolant level
The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment on
the right.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ in “Working in the engine compartment” on
page 152.
– Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle ⇒ fig. 143.
The coolant level when the engine is cold must lie between the “MIN”
and “MAX” markings. The level may also rise slightly above the “MAX”
marking when the engine is warm.
If the coolant level in the reservoir is too low, this is indicated by the warning light
in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 23. We nevertheless recommend inspecting
the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time.
Loss of coolant
A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system. You
should not merely top up the coolant in the reservoir. It is also important to have
the cooling system inspected without delay by a specialist garage.
Fig. 143 Engine
compartment: Coolant
expansion bottle
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
157
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing158
Losses can only occur through the pressure relief in the cap of the coolant expan-
sion bottle which is completely free of leaks if the coolant boils as a result of over-
heating and is forced out of the cooling system.
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 152, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
Caution
One should contact a specialist garage as soon as possible if the source of over-
heating itself cannot be determined and removed, since there may be grave
damage to the engine.
Replenishing the coolant
– Switch the engine off.
– Allow the engine to cool down.
– Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir
⇒ page 157, fig. 143 and unscrew the cap carefully by turning it to the
left ⇒ .
– Top up the coolant.
– Screw the cap tight until it is heard to lock.
The coolant which you use for replenishing the system, must comply with one
specific specification ⇒ page 156, “Coolant”. Do not use an alternative additive if
the coolant additive G12 PLUS is not available in exceptional cases. Just top up the
system with water and as soon as possible arrange adjustment to correct the mixing
ratio of water and coolant additive again by a specialist garage.
Only use fresh coolant for topping up the system.
Do not fill up over the “MAX” marking! Excess coolant which is heated up is forced
out of the cooling system through the pressure relief valve in the cap of the coolant
compensation bottle.
Wait until the engine has cooled down for a system which has suffered a major loss
of coolant before pouring in coolant. This is necessary to avoid engine damage.
WARNING
• The cooling system is pressurized! Do not open the cap of the coolant
expansion bottle if the engine is still hot - risk of scalding!
• The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health.
Avoid contact with the coolant. Coolant vapours are also harmful to the
health. It is important, therefore, to always safely store any coolant additive
in its original container out of the reach of children - risk of poisoning!
• If any splashes of coolant get into your eyes, rinse out your eyes immedi-
ately with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
• You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have inadvertently
swallowed coolant.
Caution
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Switch the engine off and obtain
professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not re-use coolant if it is necessary to drain the coolant in the system. It should
be collected and disposed of in compliance with environmental protection
regulations.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
158
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 159
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Radiator fan
The radiator fan may switch on suddenly.
The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled by a thermostat
according to the coolant temperature.
The radiator fan may continue running for up to 10 minutes after the engine has
been switched off - even if the ignition is also off. It may also switch on suddenly
after a certain time, if
• the coolant temperature has risen because of an accumulation of heat or
• the warm engine compartment is heated up additionally by strong sunlight.
WARNING
You must therefore be aware when working in the engine compartment that
the fan may switch on suddenly - risk of injury!
Brake fluid
Inspecting the brake fluid level
The brake fluid reservoir is located on the left of the engine compartment.
The brake fluid reservoir on right-hand steering models is positioned on
the other side of the engine compartment.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ in “Working in the engine compartment” on
page 152.
– Inspect the brake fluid level in the reservoir ⇒ fig. 144. The level must
be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.
A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear-and-tear
and automatic adjustment of the brake pads, and is perfectly normal.
There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid level
drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” marking. A situ-
ation where the brake fluid level is too low is indicated by the warning light
lighting up in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 27. In this case stop the car immedi-
ately and do not drive any further! Contact a Škoda Dealer to obtain profes-
sional assistance.
WARNING
• Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 152, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
• If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any
further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional
assistance.
Replacing brake fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. This causes the fluid to absorb moisture from the
surrounding air over a period of time. Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the
cause of corrosion in the brake system. The water content also lowers the boiling
point of the brake fluid. This is why brake fluid must be replaced every two
years.
Fig. 144 Engine
compartment: Brake
fluid reservoir
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
159
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing160
One may only use new genuine brake fluid from Škoda Auto a.s. The specification
for the brake fluid is “FMVSS 116 DOT 4”.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid replaced by a Škoda Service Partner
as part of an Inspection Service.
WARNING
• Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes because of
the formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system. This greatly impairs
the braking efficiency and thus also the safety of your vehicle.
• Brake fluid is toxic! It must therefore be kept safely in closed original
containers and well away from children and unauthorized persons.
Caution
Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
In view of the problems involved with proper disposal of brake fluid, the special
tools and the professional knowledge required, we recommend you have the brake
fluid replaced by a Škoda Service Partner.
Battery
Working on the battery
The battery is located in the engine compartment below a plastic box.
– Unlock the interlock on the positive terminal side of the battery
⇒ fig. 145.
– Open the cover in direction of arrow.
– The installation of the battery cover on the positive terminal side takes
place in the reverse order.
Removal and installation of the battery is not recommended since it can, under
certain circumstances, lead to major damage to the battery and fuse boxes. Contact
a specialist garage.
There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and burns when carrying out any work
on the battery and on the electrical system. For this reason, it is essential to comply
with the warning instructions ⇒ stated below and with the general applicable
rules of safety.
Fig. 145 The battery:
Open up the cover
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
160
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 161
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled
with the greatest of care. Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin
protection when handling batteries. Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the
air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages
in the lungs. Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds
after contact with the skin which take a long time to heal. Repeated contact
with diluted acids causes skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, slin cracks).
Acids coming into contact with water are diluted accompanied by significant
development of heat.
• Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings. Protect the eyes with safety glasses or a shield! There
is the danger of suffering blindness! If any battery electrolyte gets into your
eye, rinse out your eye immediately with clear water for several minutes.
Contact a doctor without delay.
• Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as
possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water. Contact a
doctor immediately if you swallow battery electrolyte.
• Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
• Hydrogen is released when you charge a battery and a highly explosive
gas mixture is produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling over
during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on.
• Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit (e.g. through metal
objects, cables). Possible consequences of a short circuit: Melting of lead
struts, explosion and burning of the battery, jets of acid spurting out.
• It is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light, to smoke or to carry
out any activities which produce sparks. Avoid creating sparks when
working with cables and electrical devices. Strong sparking represents a risk
of injury.
• Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the
engine, the ignition as well as all electrical components and disconnect the
negative cable (-) on the battery. If you wish to replace a bulb it is sufficient
to switch off the appropriate light.
• Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic
burns! Replace a frozen battery.
• Never use a battery which is damaged - risk of explosion! Immediately
replace a damaged battery.
Caution
• You must only disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched off, otherwise
the electrical system (electronic components) of the vehicle may be damaged.
When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system of the vehicle, first
disconnect the negative terminal (-) of the battery. Then disconnect the positive
terminal (+).
• When reconnecting the battery, first connect the positive terminal (+) and only
then the negative terminal (-) of the battery. You must on no account connect the
cables wrongly - risk of a cable fire.
• Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the vehicle body
otherwise damage could occur to the paintwork.
• Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the battery
housing from the effects of ultra-violet light.
For the sake of the environment
A removed battery is a special type of waste which is harmful to the environment -
we recommend that you contact your Škoda Service Partner regarding disposing of
the battery.
Note
• Please also refer to the guidelines ⇒ page 163, “Disconnecting and recon-
necting the battery”, also after connecting the battery.
WARNING (continued)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
161
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing162
Battery with a charge level indicator, the so-called magic eye*
There is a so-called magic eye ⇒ fig. 146 located on the top of the battery. The
“magic eye” changes its colour in line with the charge state of and electrolyte level
in the battery.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the “magic eye”. For this reason carefully
knock on the “magic eye” before carrying out the check.
• Green colour - the battery is adequately charged.
• Dark colour - the battery has to be charged
• Colourless or yellow colour - we recommend you have the battery checked by
a Škoda Service Partner.
Batteries, which are more than 5 years old, must be replaced. We recommend you
have the electrolyte level inspected and adjusted to the correct level or the battery
replaced if necessary by a Škoda Service Partner.
Caution
If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will
discharge because certain electrical components consume electricity (e.g. control
units) also in idle state. You can prevent the discharging of the battery by discon-
necting the negative terminal or charging the battery constantly with a very low
charging current. Please also refer to the notes when working on the battery
⇒ page 160, “Working on the battery”.
Inspecting the electrolyte level
The battery is practically maintenance-free under normal operating conditions.
We do, however, recommend that you have the electrolyte level inspected from
time to time by a Škoda Service Partner when outside temperatures are high or
when driving on long trips. You should also check the electrolyte level ⇒ page 162
each time the battery is charged.
The battery acid level will also be checked as part of the Inspection Service.
Operation in winter
The battery has to provide greater amounts of electricity during the winter. It also
has only part of the initial power output at low temperatures that it has at normal
temperatures.
A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C.
We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked by a Škoda Service
Partner before the start of the winter, and recharged if necessary.
Charging the battery
A properly charged battery is essential for reliably starting the
engine.
– Read the warning notes ⇒ in “Working on the battery” on
page 160 and ⇒ .
– Switch the ignition and all electrical components off.
– Only for “quick-charging”: Disconnect both battery cables (first of all
“negative”, then “positive”).
– Carefully attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery
terminals (red = “positive”, black = “negative”).
– You can now plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket
and switch on the charger.
Fig. 146 Battery with a
charge level indicator
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
162
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 163
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– When charging is completed: switch the charger off and unplug the
mains cable from the power socket.
– Only then should you disconnect the terminal clamps of the charger.
– Reconnect the cables to the battery (first of all “positive”, then “nega-
tive”).
It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge
the battery using low amperages (as for example from a mini-charger). Please also
refer to the instructions from the charger manufacturer.
A charging current of 0.1 of the total battery capacity (or lower) is that which should
be used until full charging is achieved.
It is, however, necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with
high amperages, so-called “quick-charging”.
“Quick-charging” a battery is dangerous ⇒ in “Working on the battery” on
page 160. It requires a special charger and appropriate knowledge. We therefore
recommend that you have your battery quick-charged only by your Škoda Service
Partner.
A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C ⇒ . We
recommend that you no longer use a battery which has thawed out because the
casing of the battery may be cracked through the formation of ice and this would
allow battery electrolyte to flow out.
The vent plugs of the battery should not be opened for charging.
WARNING
Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic
burns! Replace a frozen battery.
Disconnecting and reconnecting the battery
On disconnecting and reconnecting the battery the following functions are initially
deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault-free.
We recommend having the vehicle checked by a Škoda Service Partner to ensure
full functionality of all electrical systems.
Replacing the battery
You should only replace a battery with a new battery of the same capacity, voltage
(12 V), amperage and of the same size. Škoda Service Partners have a range of suit-
able batteries available.
We recommend that you only have an old battery disposed of by your Škoda
Service Partner since it does require special disposal.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain poisonous substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must
be disposed of in accordance with local environmental protection regulations and
on no account as domestic waste.
Operation Operating measure
Electrical power window (operational
faults)
⇒ page 40
Enter radio code number see Radio Operating Instruc-
tions
Set hours ⇒ page 12
Data in the multi-functional indicator* are
deleted.
⇒ page 13
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
163
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing164
Windshield washer system
The windshield washer reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or
rear window and for the headlamp cleaning system*. The reservoir is located in the
front left of the engine compartment ⇒ fig. 147.
The filling level of the container is 2 litres, 5.5 litres on vehicles which also have a
headlight washing system.
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights. We
therefore recommend using clean washing water together with the screen cleaner
from Škoda genuine accessories (in winter additionally with antifreeze) which is
capable of removing stubborn dirt. Follow the instructions for use on the packaging
when using screen cleaning products.
You should always add antifreeze to the cleaning water in winter even if your
vehicle is fitted with heated windscreen washer nozzles*.
It is also possible in exceptional cases to use methylated spirits when no screen
cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated spirits must
not be more than 15 %. Please note, however, that the antifreeze protection at this
concentration is only adequate down to -5°C.
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 152, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
Caution
• On no account should you add radiator antifreeze or other additives to the
windscreen washer fluid.
• If the vehicle is fitted with headlight cleaning system, you should only add
cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights
to the windscreen washer fluid. Please contact your specialist garage, who will tell
you which cleaning agent you can use.
Note
Do not take the filter out of the windscreen wash container when filling it up again
with liquid otherwise dirt can get into the liquid transportation system and can lead
to faults in operation of the windscreen wash system.
Fig. 147 Engine
compartment: Wind-
shield washer fluid reser-
voir
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
164
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Wheels and Tyres 165
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Wheels and Tyres
Wheels
General comments
• New tyres do not offer optimal grip at first and should therefore be run in for
about 500 km at a moderate speed and an appropriately cautious style of driving.
You will also profit from longer tyre life.
• The tread depth of new tyres may differ because of design features and the
configuration of the tread (depending on the type of tyre and the manufacturer).
• Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles slowly and,
where possible, at a right angles in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims.
• Inspect your tyres from time to time for damage (punctures, cuts, splits and
bulges). Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile.
• Damage to tyres and wheels is frequently not visible. Unusual vibrations or
pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage. Please reduce
your speed immediately and stop if you suspect that a wheel is damaged.
Inspect the tyres for signs of damage (bulges, splits, etc.) If no visible damage is
present, please drive at an appropriately slow speed and carefully to the nearest
specialist garage in order to have your vehicle inspected.
• Also protect your tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuel.
• Immediately replace any dust caps of the valves which have got lost.
• Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of running
can be maintained when mounted them again.
• Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool, dry and, where
possible, dark place. Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored
upright.
Unidirectional tyres*
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre. This
indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres are
fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal
properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.
Further information concerning the use of unidirectional tyres ⇒ page 169.
WARNING
• New tyres during the first 500 km do not offer optimal grip and should
therefore be run appropriately - risk of accident!
• Never drive with damaged tyres - risk of accident!
Note
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.
Tyre life
The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points:
Tyre pressure
The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are insufficiently
or over-inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the handling of your vehicle.
Correctly inflated tyres are of particular importance when travelling at high speeds.
It is therefore good to check the pressure at least once a month and also before
B1Z-0042HB1Z-0042H
Fig. 148 An opened fuel
filler flap with the tyre
inflation pressure table
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
165
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Wheels and Tyres166
setting off on a long trip. Please do not forget the spare wheel when checking the
tyres.
The tyre inflation pressures for summer tyres are indicated on the inside of the fuel
filler flap ⇒ page 165, fig. 148. The inflation pressures for winter tyres are 20 kPa
(0.2 bar) higher than those for summer tyres ⇒ page 169.
The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all
times.
Always check the inflation pressure of tyres when cold. Do not reduce the higher
pressure of warm tyres. Adapt the inflation pressure of the tyres accordingly if your
vehicle is carrying a significantly higher payload.
Driving style
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking (squealing tyres) increase wear-and-
tear on your tyres.
Balancing wheels
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. There are a wide range of influences
when driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes themselves felt
through vibration in the steering.
You should have the wheels rebalanced since any imbalance increases wear-and-
tear on the steering, the suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted and each time a tyre is repaired.
Wheel alignment errors
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear-and-tear
on the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety. Contact your
specialist garage if you notice any unusual tyre wear.
WARNING
• If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre must perform a greater flexing
work. At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this. This can
result in tread separation and even a tyre blowout.
• Immediately replace the damaged rims or tyres.
For the sake of the environment
Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.
Wear indicators
The base of the tread of the original tyres has wear indicators 1.6 mm high, installed
at right angles to the direction of travel. These wear indicators are located at 6 - 8
points depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of
the tyre ⇒ fig. 149. Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”,
triangular symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.
A remaining tread of just 1.6 mm, measured in the grooves of the tread next to the
wear indicators, means that your tyres have reached their legally permissible
minimum tread depth.
WARNING
• You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the
wear indicators have been worn down. The legally permissible minimum
tread depth should be observed.
• Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface at
high speeds on wet roads. One could experience “aquaplaning” (uncon-
trolled movements of the vehicle - “swimming” on a wet road surface).
Fig. 149 Tyre tread with
wear indicators
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
166
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Wheels and Tyres 167
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Changing wheels around
If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres, we recommend changing
the front wheels around with the rear wheels as shown in the diagram ⇒ fig. 150.
You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres.
It may be advantageous to swap the tyres over “crosswise” when certain types of
wear characteristic arise on the running surface of the tyres (but not in the case of
unidirectional tyres). Škoda Service Partners can provide you with details.
We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in order to
achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life.
New tyres and wheels
Tyres and wheel rims are important design elements. One should therefore use the
tyres and wheel rims which have been released for use by Škoda Auto. They are
exactly matched to the vehicle type and therefore contribute significantly to good
road holding and safe driving characteristics ⇒ .
Only fit radial tyres of the same type on all 4 wheels, size (rolling circumference)
and, if possible, the same tread pattern on one axle.
The Škoda Service Partners have access to the most current information about
which tyres we have released for use on your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any work relating to tyres or wheels carried out by
your Škoda Service Partner. Your dealer has all of the necessary special tools and
replacement parts available plus the required specialist knowledge and is also in a
position to properly dispose of the old tyres. A large number of Škoda Service Part-
ners also have an attractive range of tyres and wheels available.
The tyre/wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in
your vehicle documents. Approval and licensing may differ according to the legis-
lation prevailing in individual countries.
Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the correct type
of tyre. Tyres do, for example, have the following inscription on their walls:
185 / 60 R 14 82 T
What this means is:
The following speed restrictions apply to tyres.
Fig. 150 Changing
wheels around
185 Tyre width in mm
60 Height/width ratio in %
R Code letter for the type of tyre - Radial
14 Diameter of wheel in inches
82 Load index
T Speed symbol
Speed symbol Permissible maximum speed
Q 160 km/h
R 170 km/h
S 180 km/h
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
167
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Wheels and Tyres168
The date of manufacture is also stated on the tyre wall (possibly only on the inside
of wheel):
DOT ... 20 04...
means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 20th week of the year
2004.
Any spare wheel which differs from the tyres fitted to the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres
or low-profile tyres) should only be used only for a short time in the event of a
puncture and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving. It should be
replaced as quickly as possible by a normal wheel.
WARNING
• Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved for your
model of Škoda Auto a.s. vehicle. Failure to observe this instruction will
adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle - risk of accident! Approval
and licencing of your vehicle on public roads may also become void as a
result.
• You must on no account drive at a higher speed than is permissible for
your tyres - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control
over your vehicle.
• Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional
cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.
• Never fit tyres which have already been used without having adequate
knowledge of their previous history. Tyres age even if they have not been
used at all or only very little. A spare tyre must only be used in exceptional
cases and only then when adopting an appropriately cautious style of
driving.
• Do not, where possible, replace individual tyres but at least replace them
on both wheels of a given axle at the same time. Always fit the tyres with the
deeper tread depth to the front wheels.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of in conformity with the appropriate regulations.
Note
It is not normally possible to fit wheels from other models of cars for technical
reasons. This may also apply in certain circumstances to the wheels of the same
type of vehicle.
Wheel bolts
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. Each time
you fit other wheels - e.g. light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres - you must
therefore also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of
spherical cap. This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that
the brake system operates properly.
If you retrofit wheel trims (or have this done), please also ensure that an adequate
flow of air remains assured for cooling the brake system.
The Škoda Service Partners are instructed in the technical possibilities which exist
regarding converting or retrofitting wheels, tyres and wheel trim.
WARNING
• In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen
when the car is moving - risk of accident!
• The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. However, they must
never be treated with grease or oil.
• If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim
can lossen when the car is moving - risk of accident! A tightening torque
which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in
permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rims.
Caution
The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels
is 120 Nm.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
168
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Wheels and Tyres 169
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Winter tyres
The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry
roads if you fit winter tyres. Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice, snow
and at temperatures below 7 °C because of their construction (width, rubber blend,
tread pattern). This applies in particular to vehicles which are equipped with low-
profile tyres or high-speed tyres (code index H, V or W on wall of tyre).
Winter tyres must be mounted on all four wheels to obtain the best handling char-
acteristics.
You must only fit those types of winter tyre which are approved for your vehicle. The
permissible sizes of winter tyres are stated in your vehicle documents. Approvals
may differ because of national legislation.
Please remember that the tyres should be inflated to 20 kPa (0.2 bar) more than is
the case for summer tyres ⇒ page 165.
Winter tyres no longer offer the same winter performance once the tyre tread has
worn down to a depth of about 4 mm.
Ageing also causes winter tyres to lose most of their winter performance properties
- even in cases where the remaining tread depth is still clearly more than 4 mm.
Speed restrictions apply to winter tyres as well as to summer tyres ⇒ page 167,
⇒ .
You can fit winter tyres of a lower speed category to your vehicle provided that you
also do not drive faster than the permissible maximum speed for such tyres, even
if the possible maximum speed of your vehicle is higher. The corresponding tyre
category can damage the tyres when exceeding the permissible maximum speed.
Please pay attention to the notes if you decide to fit winter tyres ⇒ page 165.
You can also fit so-called “all-year tyres” instead of winter tyres.
Please contact your specialist garage if there are any points which are not clear who
will be able to provide you with information regarding the maximum speed for your
tyres.
WARNING
You must on no account drive your car at more than the permissible
maximum speed for your winter tyres - risk of an accident resulting from
tyre damage and loss of control over your car.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres on again in good time since summer tyres offer you better
grip and handling on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as ar tempera-
tures below 7 °C - the braking distance is shorter, there is less tyre noise, tyre wear
is reduced and fuel consumption is reduced.
Note
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.
Unidirectional tyres*
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre.
This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres
are fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the
optimal properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.
Should it be necessary to fit on a spare wheel in exceptional cases with a tyre not
dedicated to the running direction or in opposite running direction, please adopt a
cautious style of driving as the tyre is no longer able to provide optimal grip and
handling in such a situation. This particularly important on wet roads. Please refer
to the notes ⇒ page 175, “Spare wheel*Spare wheel”.
You should have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible and restore the
correct direction of rotation on all tyres
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
169
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Wheels and Tyres170
Snow chains
Snow chains can be used on all tyres except type 195/50 R15 and 205/45 R16 as
well as 185/60 R14 in combination with the wheel trim 6J x 14 with a depth of 38
mm.
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
When driving on wintry roads, snow chains improve not only traction, but also the
braking performance.
Only use fine-link snow chains. They must not project more than 15 mm -
including the chain lock.
Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains.
Observe the national legal requirements relating to the maximum vehicle speed
with snow chains.
WARNING
Please pay attention to the information in the supplied fitting instructions of
the snow chain manufacturer.
Caution
You must take the chains off as soon as you drive on roads which are free of snow.
They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle, damage the tyres and are rapidly
destroyed.
Note
We recommend that you use snow chains from the Škoda genuine accessories.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
170
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts 171
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts
Accessories and replacement parts
Škoda vehicles have been built according to the latest discoveries in safety engi-
neering. Thus one should not change the condition in which the vehicle was deliv-
ered from the manufacturer without some thought.
The following guidelines should be observed when a vehicle is to be retrofitted with
accessories, have technical changes made to it or a part has to be replaced at some
time in the future.
• Advise should always be obtained from a Škoda Service Partner before buying
any accessories and before making any technical changes ⇒ .
• This is particularly the case when accessories are bought in a foreign country.
• Škoda Genuine Accessories which have been released for use and Skoda orig-
inal parts can be obtained from Škoda Service Partners. They will install them
professionally and correctly.
• All Škoda original accessory which is listed in the catalogue such as tilting roofs,
spoilers, wheels etc. must have an official stamp of approval.
• Radios, aerials and other electrical accessories should only be installed by an
authorised workshop.
• The guidelines issued by Škoda Auto a.s. must be observed when making tech-
nical changes.
• This is to ensure that no technical damage occurs to the vehicle, that travelling
and operating safety are maintained and that the chnages are permissible. Škoda
Service Partners undertake this work professionally or refer it to an specialist
company in special cases.
Any damage which is done caused by technical changes made without
consulting a Skoda a.s. dealer is excluded from the guarantee.
WARNING
• We advise you, in your own interest, to only use Škoda Genuine Accesso-
ries and Škoda original parts which have been expressly approved for use on
your Škoda. Reliability, safety and suitabiliity have been established for
these Škoda original parts.
• We cannot guarantee suitability of installation into your vehicle of other
products despite keeping a constant eye on market developments (also not
in the case where there is an attestation or permission can be produced).
Technical changes
Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to opera-
tional faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected systems because
of the networking of the electronic components. This means that the operating
safety of your vehicle can be considerably jeopardized, a greater wear of vehicle
parts can occur and finally the vehicle registration documents expire.
We trust that you will understand that your Škoda Service Partner cannot be liable
for damage resulting from unprofessional work.
We therefore recommend that you have all work carried out with Škoda original
parts at your authorised Škoda Service Partners.
WARNING
Work or modifications on your vehicle, which have been carried out unpro-
fessionally, can cause operational faults - risk of accident!
WARNING (continued)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
171
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts172
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
172
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance 173
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
First-aid box* and Warning triangle*
The first-aid box is attached by a strap to the left-hand side of the luggage compart-
ment or can be housed in a special bag which is a Škoda original accessory.
The warning triangle is stored in a textile bag. There is a velcro fastener on the
underside of the textile bag. The textile bag is fixed lengthwise (in the direction of
travel) on the floor behind the rear seats with the help of the velcro fastener in such
a way that it lies against the right-hand side of the luggage compartment.
Individual parts of the equipment (the first-aid box, etc.) are stored on vehicles
which do not have a spare wheel by placing them in a plastic sleeve and fixing them
to the floor of the luggage compartment using velcro fasteners.
Room for the warning triangle and first-aid box on vehicles of the type Estate car is
found in the well under the carpet of the luggage compartment behind the spare
wheel.
The warning triangle on vehicles of the type Sedan is located in the lower part of
the boot lid ⇒ fig. 151.
Other types have the warning triangle located in the well under the carpet of the
luggage compartment.
Note
Pay attention to the use-by-date of the contents of the first-aid box.
Fire extinguisher*
The fire extinguisher is attached with a strap and a holder to the boot lid.
Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extin-
guisher.
The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person or company annu-
ally (please observe the various differing national legal requirements).
WARNING
If the fire extinguisher is not correctly attached, in case of sudden manoeu-
vres or an accident it can be “thrown” through the interior compartment and
cause injuries.
Note
• The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant and valid legal require-
ments.
• Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. If the fire extin-
guisher is used after the expiration date, its proper function is no longer assured.
• The fire extinguisher is only supplied in certain countries within the scope of
delivery.
Fig. 151 Placing of the
warning triangle in the
boot lid (on a sedan)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
173
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance174
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack are stored in a locable plastic box in the spare
wheel ⇒ fig. 152. There is also space here for the removable ball for the trailer
towing device*.
The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts (depending on equipment fitted):
• Wheel wrench,
• Hook for pulling off a full wheel trim,
• Towing eye,
• Adapter for the wheel bolts lock.
After using the lifting jack, screw in the arm of the lifting jack fully before placing it
back in its stowage area.
WARNING
• The hexagon socket in the handle of the screwdriver should only be used
to fit on the wheel bolts. Never use the hexagon socket of the screwdriver for
tightening the wheel bolts because you will not be able to achieve the neces-
sary tightening torque with the hexagon socket - risk of accident!
• The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of
vehicle. On no account attempt to lift a heavier vehicle or other loads - risk
of injury!
• Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely attached in the luggage
compartment.
Spray for repairing a tyre*
The spray for repairing a tyre is intended for rapid repair of small defects in a tyre
consisting of a damage up to a size of up to 5 mm. The spray is not at all intended
to replace a permanent repair on the tyre; this repair only serves to reach the next
workshop. The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately. Please read
the attached instructions carefully before the repair.
The spray for repairing a tyre is located with the warning triangle in a bag. There is a
velcro fastener on the underside of the bag, with which the bag is attached to the
floor of the luggage compartment in such a way that the side of the bag rests on the
right side of the luggage compartment and on the seat backrest.
The spray bottle in vehicles of the type estate car and sedan is placed in the spare
wheel well under the luggage compartment floor behind the spare wheel.
Note
Vehicles which do not have a spare wheel have the spray bottle stored in a box
under the luggage compartment floor.
Fig. 152 Luggage
compartment: Storage
compartment for vehicle
too kit
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 153 Spray for
repairing a tyre
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
174
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance 175
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit is intended for the repair of minor tyre defects. The tyre repair kit
contains a compressor, inflation bottle, operating instructions and accessories.
The repair with the tyre repair kit is not at all intended to replace a permanent
repair on the tyre, this repair only serves to reach the next workshop. The repair can
be undertaken on the vehicle immediately. Please read the attached instructions
carefully before the repair.
The tyre repair kit is located in a textile bag. There is a velcro fastener on the under-
side of the bag, with which the bag is attached to the floor of the luggage compart-
ment in such a way that the side of the bag rests on the right side of the luggage
compartment and on the seat backrest.
The tyre repair kit in vehicles of the type estate car and sedan is placed in the
spare wheel well under the luggage compartment floor behind the spare wheel.
Spare wheel*Spare wheel
The spare wheel is stowed in the spare wheel well in the luggage
compartment below the floor covering.
The spare wheel lies in a well under the luggage compartment floor and is fixed in
place along with the vehicle tool kit box using special screws ⇒ fig. 154.
One should check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel (at best when generally
checking the tyre air pressures - see sign on the fuel filler flap ⇒ page 149) to
ensure that the spare wheel is always ready to use.
Unidirectional tyres*
If you have such tyres on your vehicle, please refer to the notes below:
• The spare wheel provided with a car fitted with unidirectional tyres has different
dimensions. The wheel is provided with a warning sticker.
• After fitting on the wheel, the warning sticker must not be concealed (e.g. by the
wheel trim).
• Do not drive with this spare wheel at more than 80 km/h - risk of accident. Avoid
accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
• The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the inflation pressure
of the standard tyres.
• Use this spare wheel only to reach the nearest specialist garage as it is not
intended for continuous use.
Note
Some vehicles are only fitted with spray to make tyre repairs ⇒ page 174.
Changing a wheel
Preliminary work
The following steps should be carried out before actually changing the
wheel.
– If it is necessary to change a wheel, park the vehicle as far away as
possible from the traffic flow. The place you choose should be level.
– Have all the occupants get out. While changing a wheel, the occu-
pants of the vehicle should not stand on the road (e.g. behind a crash
barrier).
Fig. 154 Luggage
compartment: Spare
wheel
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
175
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance176
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
–Engage 1st gear or if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox,
position the selector lever into position P.
– If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.
–Take the vehicle tool kit and the spare wheel ⇒ page 174 out of the
luggage compartment.
WARNING
• If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights
system and place the warning triangle on the side of the road at the
prescribed distance from your vehicle while observing all national legal
provisions. In this way you are protecting not only yourself but also other
road users.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack - danger
of suffering injury!
Caution
If you have to change a wheel on a slope first block the opposite wheel with a stone
or similar object in order to secure the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away.
Note
Comply with the national legal regulations.
Changing a wheel
Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible.
– Take off the full wheel trim* ⇒ page 177 or the caps ⇒ page 178.
– In the case of light alloy wheels remove the wheel trim cap
⇒ page 178.
– Slacken the wheel bolts ⇒ page 178.
– Jack up the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is clear of the ground
⇒ page 179.
– Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth,
paper etc.).
– Take off the wheel.
– Fit on the spare wheel and tighten the wheel bolts slightly.
– Lower the car.
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly, alternately and diagonally using the
wheel wrench ⇒ page 178.
– Mount the full wheel trim/wheel trim cap or the caps.
Note
• All bolts must be clean and must turn easily.
• You must never grease or oil the wheel bolts!
• When fitting on unidirectional tyres, ensure that the tyres rotate in the correct
direction ⇒ page 165.
Subsequent steps
After changing the wheel, you must perform the following steps.
– Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well.
– Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided.
– Check the tyre pressure on the spare wheel just mounted as soon as
possible.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
176
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance 177
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque
wrench as soon as possible. The tightening torque for steel and light
alloy wheels must be 120 Nm.
– Have the defective tyre repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING
It is necessary to observe the guidelines given on ⇒ page 167, “New tyres
and wheels” if the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres which are
different to those it was fitted with at the works.
Note
• If you find, when changing the wheel, that the wheel bolts are corroded and
difficult to turn, the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque.
• Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed to a workshop where the tight-
ening torque can be checked.
Full wheel trim*
Pulling off
– Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge
of the full wheel trim.
– Push the wheel key through the clamp, support the wheel key on the
tyre and pull off the wheel trim ⇒ fig. 155.
Installing
– First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel at the valve opening
provided. Then press the full wheel trim into the wheel in such a way
that its entire circumference locks correctly in place.
Caution
• Use the pressure of your hand, do not knock on the full wheel trim! Heavy
knocks mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been inserted into
the wheel, can result in damage to the guide and centering elements of the full
wheel trim.
• First check for yourself that the theft-deterrent wheel bolt is located
⇒ page 180, “Securing wheels against being stolen*” in the hole in the area of the
valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which is attached with a
theft-deterrent wheel bolt.
Fig. 155 Removing the
full wheel trim
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
177
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance178
Wheel trim caps*
Pulling off
–Carefully ⇒ fig. 156 lever off the wheel trim cap using the removal
hook .
Wheel bolts with caps*
The caps are designed to protect the wheel bolts.
Pulling off
– Insert the plastic clip (in the car tool kit) sufficiently far onto the cap
until the inner catches of the clip are positioned at the collar of the
cap.
– Pull the cap off with the plastic clip ⇒ fig. 157.
Installing
– Insert the caps onto the bolts.
Slackening and tightening wheel bolts
Slacken the wheel bolts before jacking up the vehicle.
Slackening wheel bolts
– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt
6)
.
– Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn to the
left ⇒ fig. 158.
Fig. 156 Pulling off the
wheel trim cap
B1Z-0042HB1Z-0042H
Fig. 157 Changing a
wheel: Removing the cap
6)
Use the appropriate adapter for slackening and tightening the safety wheel bolts
⇒ page 180.
Fig. 158 Changing a
wheel: Slackening wheel
bolts
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
178
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance 179
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Tightening wheel bolts
– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt
6)
.
– Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt to the right until it is
tight.
WARNING
Slacken the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) as long as the vehicle
has not yet been jacked up - risk of an accident!.
Note
• Do not use the hexagon socket in the handle of the screwdriver for slackening
or tightening the wheel bolts.
• apply pressure carefully with your foot to the end of the wheel wrench if it
proves difficult to slacken the wheel bolts. Hold tight on the vehicle when doing this
and ensure that you have a steady position.
Raise vehicle
You have to raise the vehicle with a lifting jack in order to be able to
take off the wheel.
– Position the lifting jack by selecting the jacking point - lower sill -
which is closest to the wheel to be removed ⇒ fig. 159.
– Position the lifting jack below the jacking point and move it up until its
claw is positioned directly below the vertical web of the lower sill.
– Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the web of the lower sill
and the moving base plate of the jack is resting flat against firm
ground.
– Turn the lifting jack up further until the wheel is just clear of the
ground.
Ground below the lifting jack which is soft and slippery can cause the vehicle to
slip off the jack. It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid
surface or use a wide and stable base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat)
if the surface is smooth, such as cobbled stones, a tiled floor, etc.
WARNING
• Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed - risk of injury.
• Take suitable measures to prevent the base of the lifting jack from slip-
ping off - risk of injury!
• Place the lifting jack only on a solid and even surface.
• Not positioning the lifting jack at the specified points can result in
damage to the vehicle. The jack can also slip off if it does not have sufficient
grip - risk of injury!
• Never start the engine if the vehicle is lifted - risk of accident.
• Never lie under the vehicle if the vehicle is only lifted with the vehicle
lifting jack.
• It is important to support the vehicle with suitable supporting blocks if
you wish to work under the lifted vehicle - risk of injury!
Fig. 159 Changing a
wheel: Points for posi-
tioning car jack
A
A
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
179
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance180
Securing wheels against being stolen*
You need a special adapter for slackening the safety wheel bolts.
– Pull off the full wheel trim/cap from the wheel hub or cap from the
safety wheel bolt.
– Insert the adapter with its toothed side fully into the inner toothing
of the safety wheel bolt right down in such a way that only the
outer hexagon is jutting out ⇒ fig. 160.
– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the adapter .
– Slacken the wheel bolt, or tighten it firmly ⇒ page 178.
– Reinstall the full wheel trim/wheel cap after removing the adapter or
place the cap onto the safety wheel bolt.
– Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as
possible. Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening
torque of 120 Nm.
The safety wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them (one safety wheel bolt per
wheel) can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter provided.
It is meaningful to note the code number hammered into the rear side of the
adapter or the rear side of the safety wheel bolts. You can obtain a replacement
adapter from a Škoda Service Partner, if necessary, by quoting this number.
We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in
the vehicle. It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit.
Caution
• Damage can occur to the adapter and safety wheel bolt if the safety wheel bolt
is tightened up too much.
• On steel wheels, the theft-deterrent wheel bolt must always be installed in the
hole, which is close to the valve. Otherwise the full wheel trim cannot be mounted
and the full wheel trim can be damaged during the assembly.
Note
The set of safety wheel bolts can be obtained from a Škoda Service Partner.
Jump-starting
Initial steps
You can use the battery of another vehicle for jump-starting yours if the engine
does not start because the battery on your vehicle is flat. You will require jump-start
cables for this purpose.
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the battery
supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the
discharged battery in your vehicle.
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and insu-
lated terminal clamps. Please pay attention to the manufacturer's instructions.
Positive cable - colour coding in the majority of cases red.
Negative cable - colour coding in the majority of cases black.
Fig. 160 Safety wheel
bolt with adapter
A
B
A
A
B
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
180
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance 181
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C.
In case of frozen battery carry out no jump-starting - risk of explosion! Also
after thawing of the battery there is a risk of caustic burns due to leaking
acid. Replace the frozen battery.
• Please pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in
the engine compartment ⇒ page 152.
Note
• There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may
flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.
• The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the
vehicle.
• Switch off any installed telephone and also pay attention to the instructions for
use of the telephone in such a situation.
• We recommend purchasing jump-start cables from Škoda Service Partners as a
Škoda original accessory or from retailers who sell branded batteries.
Start engine
It is important to connect the jump-start cables in the correct order.
Connecting positive terminals
– Attach one end to the positive terminal ⇒ fig. 161 of the
discharged battery .
– Attach the other end to the positive terminal of the battery
supplying the power .
Connecting negative terminal and engine block
– Attach one end to the negative terminal of the battery supplying
the power .
– Attach the other end to a solid metal part which is connected
firmly to the engine block, or to the engine block itself ⇒ .
Starting engine
– Start the engine of the vehicle providing current and run the engine at
idling speed.
– Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
– Interrupt the attempt at starting an engine after 10 seconds if it does
not start right away and wait for about 30 seconds before repeating
the attempt.
– Disconnect the cables on the engine in exactly the reverse order they
were connected up.
WARNING
• The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never make contact
with each other. Furthermore, the cable connected to the positive terminal
of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts
of the vehicle - risk of a short circuit!
• Do not affix the jump starting cables to the negative terminal of the
discharged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the
Fig. 161 Jump-starting
using the battery from
another vehicle: A - flat
vehicle battery, B -
battery providing current
A
1
A
A
A
2
A
B
A
3
A
B
A
4
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
181
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance182
battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine
being started.
• Do not affix the cable end to parts of the fuel and brake system.
• Run the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating
parts in the engine compartment.
• Do not bend over the batteries - risk of caustic burns!
• The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.
• Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes etc.)
away from the battery - risk of an explosion!
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
General
Please pay attention to the following instructions if you are going to use a
tow rope:
Driver of the towing vehicle
– Do not drive off until the tow rope is taught.
– Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the
accelerator particularly gently if your vehicle is fitted with an auto-
matic gearbox.
Driver of the towed vehicle
– Switch the ignition on so that the steering wheel is not blocked and
you can also operate the turn signal lights, the headlight flasher, the
windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system.
– Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N
if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
– Note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the
engine is running. You will require significantly greater physical force
to depress the brake pedal and to steer the vehicle if the engine is not
running.
– Ensure that the tow rope is always kept taught.
Tow rope or tow bar
A tow bar is safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimizes any shocks. You can
use a tow rope only if a suitable tow bar is not available.
The tow rope must be elastic to protect the vehicle. Thus one should only use
plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material.
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the towing eyes provided for this
purpose ⇒ page 183, “Front towing eye” and ⇒ page 183, “Rear towing eye”.
Driving style
Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice. Both drivers should
be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle. Unskilled drivers
should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in.
One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing forces or
jerky loadings. There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at
the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a
vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.
Caution
If the gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a defect, your
vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground, or
on a special vehicle transporter or trailer.
Note
• Please comply with any legal requirements particularly regarding the switched
on signal systems, when towing in or tow-starting another vehicle.
• The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the
front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle.
WARNING (continued)
A
4
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
182
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance 183
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Front towing eye
The towing eye is stored in the box for the vehicle tool kit.
Installing the towing eye
– Grasp the protective grille at the point ⇒ fig. 162 marked with the
arrow.
– Remove the protective grille (arrow ).
– Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop ⇒ fig. 163.
– Tighten up the towing eye using the wheel wrench (push the wheel
wrench through eye).
Removal of the towing eye
– Unscrew the towing eye.
– Put the protective grille in place on the side opposite the marking.
– Press into place the protective grille onto the side facing the marking.
– The protective grille must engage firmly.
Rear towing eye
The rear towing eye is located below the rear bumper on the right ⇒ fig. 164.
Tow-starting a vehicle
If the engine does not start, we generally do not recommend to tow-start
your vehicle. One should attempt to start the engine using jump start
cables ⇒ page 180 or call on the services of the SERVICE mobile.
If your vehicle has to be towed:
– Engage 2nd or 3rd gear with the vehicle stationary.
– Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep it depressed.
Fig. 162 Front bumper:
Protective grille
Fig. 163 Front bumper:
Installing the towing eye
A
A
Fig. 164 Rear towing eye
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
183
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Breakdown assistance184
– Switch on the ignition.
– Wait until both vehicles are moving then release the clutch pedal
slowly.
– Depress the clutch pedal fully when the engine fires and take the
vehicle out of gear.
For technical reasons it is not possible to tow-start a car fitted with an automatic
gearbox.
WARNING
There is high risk of having an accident when tow-starting a vehicle, when
for example the towed vehicle runs into the towing vehicle.
Caution
Vehicles which are fitted with a catalytic converter should not be tow-started over
a distance of more than 50 metres. Unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
Towing in a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox
Please refer to the notes ⇒ page 182.
The car can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels
raised. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
Towing of a vehicle with an automatic gearbox
Please refer to the notes ⇒ page 182.
The car can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope. Refer at the same time to the
following guidelines:
• Move selector lever into N.
• The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
• The maximum permissible towing distance is 50 km. The gear oil pump does
not operate when the engine is not running; the gearbox would not be adequately
lubricated at higher speeds and over longer towing distance.
Caution
If the vehicle is towed in by a recovery vehicle, it should only be towed in with the
front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the automatic gearbox is
damaged!
Note
The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to
tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than
50 km.
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
184
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 185
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fuses and light bulbs
Electric fuses
Replacing fuses in the dash panel
Defect fuses must be replaced.
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
on the left side of the dash panel behind the safety cover.
– Switch the ignition off and also the electrical component affected.
– Set the screwdriver under the safety cover (on the recess in the safety
cover), lever it up carefully in the direction of the arrow and take it
out in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 165.
– Find out which fuse belongs to the component which is not operating
⇒ page 186, “Fuse assignment in the dash panel”.
– Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the fuse cover, insert it onto the
respective fuse and pull out this fuse.
– Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips. Replace the
defect fuse by a new fuse of the same ampere number.
– First shift the safety cover into the dash panel in the direction of arrow
then press the safety cover in the direction of the arrow in such
a way that the guide lug locks into the opening of the dash panel.
We recommend that you carry the box of replacement fuses with you which was
delivered in your vehicle. You can obtain replacement fuses
7)
from a Škoda Service
Partner.
Colour coding of fuses
Caution
• Never attempt to “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a
higher amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the
electrical system.
• Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage
if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time.
Fig. 165 Left side of the
dash panel: fuse cover
A
A
A
B
7)
Replacement fuses are, on the other hand, part of the basic equipping of the vehicle in some
countries.
Colour Maximum amperage
light brown 5
brown 7,5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
white 25
green 30
B
A
A
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
185
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs186
Note
We recommend that you have these fuses replaced by a specialist garage.
Fuse assignment in the dash panel
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions
or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
No. Power consumer Amperes
1 Instrument cluster, ESP 5
2 Brake lights 10
3 Power supply for the diagnostics, air-conditioning system 5
4 Interior lighting 10
5 Not assigned
6 Lights and Visibility 5
7 Engine electronics, power-assisted steering 5
8 Not assigned
Fig. 166 Schematic
representation of fuse
carrier
9 Lambda probe 10
10
S-contact
a)
5
11
Electrically adjustable rear mirror
b)
5
12
Ventilation system, air-conditioning system, Xenon head-
light
5
13 Reversing light 10
14 Diesel engine control unit 10
15 Headlight cleaning system, window wiper 10
16 Instrument cluster 5
17
Petrol engine - control unit
c)
5
18 Phone 5
19 Automatic gearbox 10
20 Control unit for lamp failure 5
21 Heated windscreen washer nozzles 5
22 Not assigned
23 Right main beam 10
24 Engine electronics 10
25
Control unit for ABS, TCS
control unit for ESP
5
10
26 Not assigned
27 Not assigned
28 Cruise control, switch for the brake and clutch pedal 5
29 Not assigned
30 Main beam on the left and indicator light 10
31 Central locking system - door lock for the boot lid 10
No. Power consumer Amperes
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
186
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 187
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
32 Rear window wiper 10
33 Parking light on the right 5
34 Parking light on the left 5
35 Injector - petrol engine 10
36 Licence plate light 5
37 Rear fog light and indicator light 5
38 Heating of the external mirror 5
39 Rear window heater 20
40 Horn 20
41 Front window wiper 20
42 Cigarette lighter, power socket 15
43
Central control unit, selector lever lock for the automatic
gearbox
20
44 Turn signals 15
45 Radio, navigation system 20
46 Electrical power window (at the front on the right) 25
47 Not assigned
48 Diesel engine - control unit, injector 30
49 Central locking system 15
50 Low beam on the right 15
51 Power socket in the luggage compartment 15
52 Ignition 15
53 Electrical power window (at the rear on the right) 25
54 Low beam on the left 15
55 Not assigned
No. Power consumer Amperes
56 Control unit - petrol engine 20
57 Towing device 25
58 Electrical power window (at the front on the left) 25
59 Not assigned
60 Horn for the anti-theft alarm system 15
61 Fuel pump - petrol engine 15
62 Electric sliding/tilting roof 25
63 Seat heaters 15
64 Headlight cleaning system 20
65 Fog lights 15
66 Electrical power window (at the rear on the left) 25
67 Not assigned
68 Fresh air blower 25
a)
For power consumers, e.g. the radio, which can be operated with the ignition switched
off as long as the ignition key is not withdrawn.
b)
For vehicles with an electrical power window system
c)
It is 15 amps for a vehicle with a 1.2 litre engine.
No. Power consumer Amperes
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
187
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs188
Replaces fuses at the battery
– Open the positive terminal cover (+) ⇒ fig. 167.
– Press onto the interlocks of the fuse covers ⇒ fig. 168 and open
the covers.
– Press together the interlocks of the fuse cover simultaneously and
push out the cover in the direction of the arrow.
– Find out which fuse belongs to the component which is not operating
⇒ page 188, “Fuse assignment at battery”.
– Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips. Replace the
defect fuse by a new fuse of the same ampere number.
Caution
• Never attempt to “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a
higher amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the
electrical system.
• Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage
if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time.
Note
• We recommend that you have these fuses replaced by a specialist garage.
• Some vehicles are only fitted with the cover ⇒ fig. 168.
Fuse assignment at battery
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions
or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
Fig. 167 The battery:
Opening of the positive
terminal cover.
Fig. 168 The battery:
fuse cover
A
A
A
B
A
B
B6Y-0314H
Fig. 169 Schematic
representation of fuse
assignment at battery
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
188
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 189
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Bulbs
Replacing bulbs
The relevant lamp must always be switched off before a light bulb is replaced.
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest amount of
dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth, serviette or some-
thing similar.
Defect light bulbs should only be replaced with light bulbs of the same type. The
designation is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
Changing certain bulbs is not something which you can do yourself, but requires to
be done by a specialist. Other parts of the vehicle must be removed in order to
change the light bulbs. This applies, in particular, to bulbs which can only be
reached from the engine compartment.
We therefore recommend that you have any bulbs changed by a Škoda Service
Partner or, in exceptional cases, by calling on other professional assistance.
Please note that the engine compartment is a hazardous area ⇒ page 152,
“Working in the engine compartment”.
We recommend that you carry the set of light bulbs with you which was delivered
in your vehicle. Replacement light bulbs
8)
are available at a Škoda Service Partner.
The set of light bulbs can be stowed in the spare wheel well.
Fitted with a xenon headlight
Change of light bulbs on Xenon lights (low beam lights, parking lights and main
beam lights) should be undertaken by a Škoda Service Partner.
Overview of bulbs
No. Power consumer Amperes
1 Dynamo 175
2 Interior 110
3 The radiator fan 40
4 ABS or TCS or ESP 40
5 Power steering 50
6
Glow plugs
a)
a)
Only for diesel engine 1.9/96 kW.
50
7 ABS or TCS or ESP 25
8 The radiator fan 30
9 The air conditioning system 5
10 Engine control unit 15
11 Central control unit 5
12 Automatic gearbox 5
8)
Replacement light bulbs are, on the other hand, part of the basic equipping of the vehicle in
some countries.
Front headlight Halogen headlight Xenon headlight
Low beam H7 D2S
Main beam H3 H3
Parking lights W5W
Turn signals PY21W
Fog lights HB4
Rear light unit Bulb
Reversing light P21W
Turn signals PY21W
Brake lights P21W
Parking light and rear fog light P21/4W
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
189
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs190
WARNING
• Bulbs H7 and H3 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb
- risk of injury!
• It is recommended to wear gloves and eye protection when changing a
light bulb.
• Gas discharge bulbs* (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage, profes-
sional knowledge is required - danger to life!
Note
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is assumed
that no major complications will arise. Other light bulbs should be changed by your
specialist garage.
Front headlight
It is necessary to remove the protective cover at the rear of the headlight
before replacing a light bulb on a main beam light, low beam light and
parking light.
– Open the bonnet.
– Press the securing spring downwards and remove the protective cover
⇒ fig. 170.
Others Bulb
Side turn signal lights WY5W
Licence plate light C5W
3. Brake light LED
Interior light C10W
Reading lights W5W
Luggage compartment light W5W
Door warning light W5W
Storage compartment light - front passen-
ger side
C3W
Fig. 170 Protective cover
for the headlight at the
front
Fig. 171 Front headlight:
Installing the light bulbs
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
190
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 191
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Assignment of the light bulbs in the headlight (on the right-hand side) ⇒ page 190,
fig. 171.
- main beam light
- low beam light
- parking lights
Note
For vehicles with a 2.0 litre/85 kW engine, we recommend that you have the light
bulbs for the main beam lights, low beam lights and parking lights changed by a
Skoda Service Partner.
Main beam
– Open the bonnet.
– Remove the protective cover at the rear of the headlight ⇒ page 190,
fig. 170.
– Disconnect the plug connector .
– Press together the sprung wire clamp on the lamp holder and
swing down.
– Remove the halogen lamp with cable. Insert the new halogen lamp in
such a way that the fixing lug on the reflector lies in the corresponding
recess in the lamp plate.
– Close the sprung wire clamp over the plate. Press together the sprung
wire clamp and lock together again.
– Plug into the plug connector ⇒ fig. 172.
– We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a
Skoda Service Partner after replacing the light bulb.
Parking light at the front
– Open the bonnet.
– Remove the protective cover at the rear of the headlight ⇒ page 190,
fig. 170.
– Pull the lamp holder with light bulb for the parking light out of the
headlight ⇒ fig. 173.
– Pull the defect light bulb out of the lamp holder.
– Insert the new light bulb.
A
1
A
2
A
3
Fig. 172 Removing the
light bulb for the main
beam light
A
B
A
A
A
B
Fig. 173 Structure of the
light bulb of the parking
light
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
191
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs192
– Insert the lamp holder with new light bulb into of the headlight.
Low beam
– Open the bonnet.
– Remove the protective cover at the rear of the headlight ⇒ page 190,
fig. 170.
– Unplug plug .
– Unlock the sprung wire clamp downwards by pressing in direction
of the light bulb and swing.
– Remove the light bulb and insert the new light bulb in such a way
that the fixing lug on the reflector lies in the corresponding recess in
the lamp plate.
–Close the sprung wire clamp over the plate and engage it again.
–Plug in plug ⇒ fig. 174.
– We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a
Skoda Service Partner after replacing the light bulb.
Turn signal light (at the front)
– Open the bonnet.
– Screw out the lamp holder and light bulb by turning it anti-clockwise
⇒ fig. 175.
– Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left and
remove.
– Insert the new light bulb and turn it fully to the right.
– Insert the lamp holder with light bulb into the headlight. Secure the
lamp holder by turning it to the right until it locks in place.
Fig. 174 Removing the
light bulb for the low
beam light
A
A
A
B
A
1
A
A
Fig. 175 Removing the
light bulb for the turn
signal light
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
192
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 193
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Lighting in storage compartment on front passenger side*
We recommend having the light bulb replaced by a Škoda Service Partner.
– Push in a knife or similar from the side between the light and the glove
compartment ⇒ fig. 176. Lever out the light carefully.
– Disconnect the plug by pressing the catch from the side.
– Replace the defective light bulb.
– Recreate the plug connection.
– Press the light into the glove compartment from below.
Interior light and the reading light*
– Pull the diffusion disk (see arrow) downwards from the housing
⇒ fig. 177.
– Take the faulty light bulb out of the interior light and insert a new one.
– Pull the light bulb out of its holder and insert the new one.
– Press the diffusion disk back into the housing until it clicks into place
(ensure that it is in the right position).
Licence plate light
Fig. 176 Remove
lighting in storage
compartment on front
passenger side
Fig. 177 Remove interior
light
Fig. 178 Remove the
licence plate light
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
193
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs194
– Open the boot lid and unscrew the light glass.
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.
– Re-insert the light glass. Press the light glass in up to the stop - check
for correct seating of the sealing rubber.
– Screw on the light glass but not too tightly.
Front door warning light*
We recommend having the light bulb replaced by a Škoda Service Partner.
– Push in a knife or similar from the side between the light and the door
panel ⇒ fig. 179. Lever out the light carefully.
– Disconnect the plug connector.
– Replace the defective light bulb.
– Recreate the plug connection.
– Insert the door warning light into the door panel from the plug side
and press in.
Rear light unit
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.
– Push the cover to the side carefully.
– Press the fixing straps in the upper part of the light bulb holder in the
direction of the arrow and remove the light bulb holder ⇒ fig. 180.
– Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left and
remove.
– Insert the new light bulb and turn it fully to the right.
– Insert the light bulb holder into the opening of the rear light from
below and interlock the fixing straps into the upper part.
– Push the cover back into place.
Fig. 179 Remove the
front door warning light
Fig. 180 Remove light
bulb holder
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
194
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 195
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Rear light unit (estate car, sedan)
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.
– Remove the cover in the boot.
– Press the catch in direction of arrow and pull out the light bulb holder.
– Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left and
remove.
– Insert the new light bulb and turn it fully to the right.
– Insert the light bulb holder again, the plastic tongue must lock in
place.
– Install the cover in the boot.
Luggage compartment light
– Open the boot lid and remove the luggage compartment cover.
– Insert a screwdriver into the slot next to the light ⇒ fig. 182. Lever out
the light carefully.
– Disconnect the plug connector.
– Replace the defective light bulb.
– Recreate the plug connection.
– Insert the light from the rear and press it forwards up to the stop.
Fig. 181 Remove the
light bulb holder (estate
car, sedan)
Fig. 182 Remove the
luggage compartment
light
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
195
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Fuses and light bulbs196
Boot light (sedan)
– Insert a screwdriver into the slot under the light ⇒ fig. 183. Lever out
the light carefully.
– Unlock the lug then pull out the plug.
– Push away the spring clip on the cover and remove the cover.
– Replace the defective light bulb.
– Insert the cover again and secure it by locking it in place.
– Recreate the plug connection.
– Insert the light from the rear and press it forwards up to the stop.
Fig. 183 Remove the
boot light (sedan)
A
1
A
2
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
196
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 197
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Technical Data
Technical Data
General comments
The details given in the official vehicle registration documents always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual. Please refer to the official vehicle
registration documents or consult your Škoda Service Partner concerning the
engine with which your vehicle is equipped.
Used abbreviations
Performances
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reducing
equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
Weight
The loading capacity is reduced in line with the range of the special equipment. The
unloaden weight contains a fuel tank topped up to 90%. A driver with a weight of
75 kg is also included in the value.
Identification details
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker ⇒ fig. 184 is located on the floor of the luggage compart-
ment and is also stated in the Service schedule.
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data:
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle type
Abbrevia-
tion
Importance
kW Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output
rpm Engine revolutions per minute
Nm Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
g/km
discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kil-
ometer
RON
Research octane number, measuring unit for the knocking
resistance of petrol
Fig. 184 Vehicle data
sticker
A
1
A
2
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
197
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data198
Gearbox code, paint number, interior equipment number, engine output,
engine code
Partial description of the vehicle
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into the
engine compartment on the right hand shock absorber dome. This number is also
located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen (together with
a VIN bar code).
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the engine block.
Type plate (production plate)
The type plate is located in the engine compartment at the front on the left hand
shock absorber dome.
Homologation sign
The homologation sign is located on the lock carrier. Vehicles for certain countries
do not have an homologation sign.
Sticker on inside of fuel filler flap
The sticker is affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap. The sticker contains the
following data:
• The prescribed types of fuel,
• Tyre size,
• Tyre pressure.
Fuel consumption according to the regulations EU2,
EU3, EU4 (99/100/EU)
Depending on the range of the special equipment, style of driving, traffic situation,
weather influences and vehicle condition, the consumption values which in prac-
tice result when using the vehicle can deviate from the indicated values.
Urban traffic
The consumption measurement in urban traffic begins with starting of the cold
engine. Afterwards the normal urban traffic is simulated.
Non-urban traffic
For the consumption measurement in non-urban traffic the vehicle, as in daily
motoring, is accelerated and braked several times in all gears. The vehicle speed
changes within the range from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined traffic
The consumption value in the combined traffic consists of 37% from the value for
the urban traffic and of 63% from the value for the non-urban traffic.
A
3
A
4
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
198
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 199
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Dimensions
Dimensions (mm)
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN RS
Length 3970 4232 4232 4002
Width 1646 1646 1646 1646
Width including exterior mirror 1893 1893 1893 1893
Height 1451 1452 1449 1441
Wheel base 2462 2462 2462 2462
Track gauge front / rear 1435/1424 1435/1424 1435/1424 1432/1422
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
199
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data200
Technical Data
1.2 ltr./40 kW EU 2DDK/EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Capacities (in liter)
Power output kW per rpm 40/4750
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 108/3000
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
3/1198
Fuel - unleaded petrol min. RON 95
FAB IA ESTATE CAR SEDAN PRAKTIK
Maximum speed km/h 151 153 151 151
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 18,4 18,7 18,8 18,9
EU2 EU4
Urban 7,7 7,7
Non-urban 4,8 4,8
Combination 5,9 5,9
CO
2
emission - combination
141 140
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
3,0
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,1
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
200
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 201
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
FABIA FABIA ESTATE CAR FABIA SEDAN FABIA PRAKTIK
Permissible gross weight
1560
1515
a)
a)
without power steering
1595 1590 1535
Unloaden weight ready for work
1045
1010
a)
1080 1075 1085
Loading capacity
515
505
a)
515 515 450
Loading capacity when using the TLC 415 405 415 360
Permissible front axle load
820
765
a)
820 820 820
Permissible rear axle load 800 840 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(800/450)
b)
(950/450)
c)
b)
Uphills up to 12%
c)
Uphills up to 8 %
(750/450)
b)
(900/450)
c)
(750/450)
b)
(900/450)
c)
(750/450)
b)
(900/450)
c)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
201
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data202
1.2 ltr./47 kW EU 2DDK/EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Capacities (in liter)
Power output kW per rpm 47/5400
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 112/3000
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
3/1198
Fuel - unleaded petrol min. RON 95
FAB IA ESTATE CAR SEDAN PRAKTIK
Maximum speed km/h 160 162 160 160
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 15,9 16,3 16,3 16,4
EU2 EU4
Urban
7,7 (7,8)
a)
a)
Fabia Praktik
7,7 (7,9)
a)
Non-urban 5,1
4,9 (5,1)
a)
Combination
6,0 (6,1)
a)
5,9 (6,1)
a)
CO
2
emission - combination
144 (146)
a)
140 (145)
a)
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
3,0
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,1
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
202
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 203
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
FABIA FABIA ESTATE CAR FABIA SEDAN FABIA PRAKTIK
Permissible gross weight 1570 1605 1600 1545
Unloaden weight ready for work 1055 1090 1085 1095
Loading capacity 515 515 515 450
Loading capacity when using the TLC 415 405 415 360
Permissible front axle load 820 900 900 900
Permissible rear axle load 800 840 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(800/450)
a)
(950/450)
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12%
b)
Uphills up to 8 %
(750/450)
a)
(900/450)
b)
(750/450)
a)
(900/450)
b)
(750/450)
a)
(900/450)
b)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
203
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data204
1.4 ltr./55 kW EU 2DDK/EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 55/5000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 126/3800
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1390
Fuel - unleaded petrol min. RON 95
FABIA
FABIA
a)
a)
valid for vehicles with automatic gearbox
ESTATE CAR
a)
SEDAN
a)
Maximum speed km/h 167 166 169 166
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 13,8 17 17,3 17,3
FAB IA
EU2, EU4
FAB IA
a)
EU2, EU4
a)
valid for vehicles with automatic gearbox
ESTATE CAR
a)
EU2, EU4
SEDAN
a)
EU2, EU4
Urban 8,6 10,3 10,3 10,3
Non-urban 5,3 6,0 6,0 6,0
Combination 6,5 7,6 7,6 7,6
CO
2
emission - combination
154 182 182 182
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
204
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 205
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Capacities (in liter)
Weight (in kg)
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
3,2
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,5
FABIA
ESTATE CAR
a)
a)
valid for vehicles with automatic gearbox
SEDAN
a)
Permissible gross weight
1575
1610
a)
1645 1640
Unloaden weight ready for work
1060
1095
a)
1130 1125
Loading capacity 515 515 515
Loading capacity when using the TLC 415 405 415
Permissible front axle load 900 900 900
Permissible rear axle load 800 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(800/450)
b)
(950/450)
c)
b)
Uphills up to 12%
c)
Uphills up to 8 %
(800/450)
b)
(950/450)
c)
(800/450)
b)
(950/450)
c)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
205
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data206
1.4 ltr./59 kW EU 2DDK/EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Capacities (in liter)
Power output kW per rpm 59/5000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 132/3800
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1390
Fuel - unleaded petrol min. RON 95
ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Maximum speed km/h 175 173
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 13,1 13,1
ESTATE CAR
EU2/EU4
SEDAN
Urban 8,7/8,8 8,6
Non-urban 5,4/5,5 5,3
Combination 6,6/6,7 6,5
CO
2
emission - combination
156/160 154
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
3,2
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,5
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
206
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 207
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Permissible gross weight 1610 1605
Unloaden weight ready for work 1095 1090
Loading capacity 515 515
Loading capacity when using the TLC 405 415
Permissible front axle load 900 900
Permissible rear axle load 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(800/450)
a)
(950/450)
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12%
b)
Uphills up to 8 %
(800/450)
a)
(950/450)
b)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
207
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data208
1.4 ltr./74 kW EU 2DDK/EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Capacities (in liter)
Power output kW per rpm 74/6000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 126/4400
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1390
Fuel - unleaded petrol min. RON 95
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Maximum speed km/h 185 186 185
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 11,5 11,6 11,6
FABIA ESTATE CAR EU2/EU4 SEDAN EU2/EU4
Urban 8,9 9,0/9,1 9,0/9,1
Non-urban 5,3 5,4/5,5 5,4/5,5
Combination 6,6 6,7/6,8 6,7/6,8
CO
2
emission - combination
158 161/163 161/163
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
3,2
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,5
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
208
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 209
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Permissible gross weight 1580 1615 1610
Unloaden weight ready for work 1065 1100 1095
Loading capacity 515 515 515
Loading capacity when using the TLC 415 405 415
Permissible front axle load 900 900 900
Permissible rear axle load 800 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(850/450)
a)
(1000/450)
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12%
b)
Uphills up to 8 %
(850/450)
a)
(1000/450)
b)
(850/450)
a)
(1000/450)
b)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
209
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data210
2.0 ltr./85 kW EU 2DDK/EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Capacities (in liter)
Power output kW per rpm 85/5400
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 170/2400
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1984
Fuel - unleaded petrol min. RON 95
FAB IA ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Maximum speed km/h 195 197 196
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 9,9 10,1 10,2
FABIA EU2/EU4 ESTATE CAR EU2/EU4 SEDAN EU2/EU4
Urban 11,0/10,9 11,0/10,9 11,0/10,9
Non-urban 6,1/5,9 6,1/5,9 6,1/5,9
Combination 7,8/7,7 7,8/7,7 7,8/7,7
CO
2
emission - combination
187/184 187/184 187/184
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
4,0
Cooling system of the vehicle 6,9
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
210
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 211
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Permissible gross weight 1625 1660 1655
Unloaden weight ready for work 1110 1145 1140
Loading capacity 515 515 515
Loading capacity when using the TLC 415 405 415
Permissible front axle load 900 900 900
Permissible rear axle load 800 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(1000/500)
a)
(1200/500)
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12%
b)
Uphills up to 8 %
(1000/500)
a)
(1200/500)
b)
(1000/500)
a)
(1200/500)
b)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
211
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data212
1.4 l/51 kW TDI PD EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Capacities (in liter)
Power output kW per rpm 51/4000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 155/2200
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
3/1422
Fuel Diesel
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN PRAKTIK
Maximum speed km/h 162 166 164 163
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 15,6 15,8 15,8 16
Urban 5,9
Non-urban 4,1
Combination 4,7
CO
2
emission - combination
124
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
3,8
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,5
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
212
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 213
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN PRAKTIK
Permissible gross weight 1635 1670 1665 1610
Unloaden weight ready for work 1120 1155 1150 1160
Loading capacity 515 515 515 450
Loading capacity when using the TLC 415 405 415 360
Permissible front axle load 900 900 900 900
Permissible rear axle load 800 840 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(900/450)
a)
(1100/450)
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12%
b)
Uphills up to 8 %
(900/450)
a)
(1100/450)
b)
(900/450)
a)
(1100/450)
b)
(900/450)
a)
(1100/450)
b)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
213
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data214
1.4 l/59 kW TDI PD EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Capacities (in liter)
Power output kW per rpm 59/4000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 195/2200
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
3/1422
Fuel Diesel
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Maximum speed km/h 170 173 172
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 13,8 14 14
Urban 5,7
Non-urban 4,1
Combination 4,6
CO
2
emission - combination
120
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
3,8
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,5
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
214
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 215
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
FAB IA ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Permissible gross weight 1645 1680 1675
Unloaden weight ready for work 1130 1165 1160
Loading capacity 515 515 515
Loading capacity when using the TLC 415 405 415
Permissible front axle load 900 900 900
Permissible rear axle load 800 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(1000/450)
a)
(1200/450)
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12%
b)
Uphills up to 8 %
(1000/450)
a)
(1200/450)
b)
(1000/450)
a)
(1200/450)
b)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
215
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data216
1.9 ltr./47 kW SDI EU 3
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Capacities (in liter)
Power output kW per rpm 47/4000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm
125/
1600-2800
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1896
Fuel Diesel
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN PRAKTIK
Maximum speed km/h 158 162 158 157
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 17,9 18,3 18,3 18,5
Urban 6,3
Non-urban 4,0
Combination 4,8
CO
2
emission - combination
130
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
4,3
Cooling system of the vehicle 6,6
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
216
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 217
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN PRAKTIK
Permissible gross weight 1640 1675 1670 1615
Unloaden weight ready for work 1125 1160 1155 1165
Loading capacity 515 515 515 450
Loading capacity when using the TLC 415 405 415 360
Permissible front axle load 900 900 900 900
Permissible rear axle load 800 840 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(800/450)
a)
(950/450)
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12%
b)
Uphills up to 8 %
(800/450)
a)
(950/450)
b)
(800/450)
a)
(950/450)
b)
(800/450)
a)
(950/450)
b)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
217
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data218
1,9 l/74 kW TDI PD EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Capacities (in liter)
Power output kW per rpm 74/4000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm
240/
1800-2400
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1896
Fuel Diesel
FABIA ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Maximum speed km/h 185 187 185
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 11,5 11,6 11,6
Urban 6,4
Non-urban 4,0
Combination 4,9
CO
2
emission - combination
129
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
4,3
Cooling system of the vehicle 6,8
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
218
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 219
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
FAB IA ESTATE CAR SEDAN
Permissible gross weight 1660 1695 1690
Unloaden weight ready for work 1145 1180 1175
Loading capacity 515 515 515
Loading capacity when using the TLC 415 405 415
Permissible front axle load 900 900 900
Permissible rear axle load 800 840 840
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
(1000/450)
a)
(1200/450)
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12%
b)
Uphills up to 8 %
(1000/450)
a)
(1200/450)
b)
(1000/450)
a)
(1200/450)
b)
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
219
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data220
1.9 ltr./96 kW TDI PD (Fabia RS) EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 96/4000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 310/1900
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1896
Fuel Diesel
Maximum speed km/h 206
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 9,5
Urban 6,9
Non-urban 4,4
Combination 5,3
CO
2
emission - combination
140
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
220
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data 221
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Capacities (in liter)
Weight (in kg)
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 45/7,5
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 2/5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 155.
4,3
Cooling system of the vehicle 6,8
Permissible gross weight 1720
Unloaden weight ready for work 1245
Loading capacity 475
Permissible front axle load 960
Permissible rear axle load 800
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
221
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Technical Data222
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
222
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Index 223
Index
A
Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 100
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Alternator
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Antilock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Antilock brake system - ABS
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Auto Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Emergency programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Automatic vehicle wash systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Automatic wiper/washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 160
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Inspecting the electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Operation in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Brake
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Brake pads
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Brake system
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Button on the driver's door
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
C
Car jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Car state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Changing the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Changing wheels around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Child safety seat
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
223
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Index224
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Classification into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Children and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Clothes hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Cockpit
General view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Convenience operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Converting/masking over headlights . . . . . . . . . . 136
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Coolant temperature/coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
D
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 78
De-icing the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Detachable towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Diesel engines
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Door
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Drinks can holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Driving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
E
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Electric power-operated window
Operational faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Electric sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Electrically adjustable rear mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Electronic Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 30
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Electronic stability programme (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . 125
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Emergency locking of the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Engine
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Engine compartment
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Engine electronics
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 135
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Exhaust gas
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Exhaust gas inspection
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Exterior mirror heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
F
First-aid box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
224
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Index 225
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 132
Saving energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fuel reserve
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Full wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fuse
Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
G
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Gearbox
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
General view
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Hazard warning light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Headlights
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Heated windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Heating the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
I
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Interior light
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Interior lighting
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Intermittent wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
J
Jacking points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 181
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
L
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Leather care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Light bulbs
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Lighting of the interior of the vehicle
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Lights
converting/masking over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Liquid in reservoir for windscreen washer system
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Lock
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
lock
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 32
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Locking and unlocking from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Locking of the door
in an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
225
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Index226
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Folding double hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Luggage compartment door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Manual shifting of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Memory for the on-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Multi-functional indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
N
Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
New tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
O
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Opening a single door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Opening doors
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Operation in winter
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
De-icing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Overview of the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 153
P
Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Petrol engines
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
R
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Radio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Raise vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rear armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rear cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Rear mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Recharge battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Recirculated air mode
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Refuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Refuel with fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Running in the car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
S
Safe securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Safety information
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Saving electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Seat belt height adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
226
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Index 227
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
taking off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Service Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Service Interval Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting temperature
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Stability programme (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Steering force assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Storage compartment
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Storage facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Switch in the driver door
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Switching lights on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
T
Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Temperature
outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
the first 1 500 kilometres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
The roof luggage rack system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Thickness of brake pads
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Towing eye
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
towing vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Traction control system (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Turn signal system for vehicles towing a trailer
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Two-way radio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Tyres
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Unidirectional tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
W
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
with a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Washing vehicle by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Wax treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
227
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Index228
Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
slackening and tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Wheel bolts lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 177
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Windows
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Windscreen Wiper and Washer System
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Wiper blades
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
X
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
228
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Notes 229
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
229
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Notes230
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
230
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Notes 231
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
231
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
Škoda Auto pursues a policy of constant product and model development. We trust
that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape, equipment and
engineering, may be introduced at any time. It is therefore not possible for legal
claims to be made based on the data, illustrations and descriptions contained in
this Owner's Manual.
Reprinting, reproduction or translation, either in whole or in part, is not permitted
without the written consent of Škoda Auto.
Škoda Auto expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
We reserve the right to make changes to this document.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2007
NKO
A04
20
.
book
Page
232
Friday
,
March
2
,
2007
2:18
PM
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaService
ŠkodaGenuine Parts
ŠkodaGenuine Accessories
02_07.indd 202_07.indd 2 12.2.2007 9:51:1912.2.2007 9:51:19
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaFabia
OWNER´ S MANUAL
How you can contribute to a cleaner environment
The fuel consumption of your Škoda - and thus the level of
pollutants contained in the exhaust - is also determined by how
you drive.
The noise level and wear and tear are also influenced by how
you personally handle your vehicle. This Owner ´s Manual tells
you how to drive your Škoda to achieve the minimum impact
on the environment, and how to save money at the same time.
Look up „Environment“ in the Index to find out more.
Please also refer to all the texts identified with a ❀
in this
Owner ´s Manual.
Make your contribution - for the sake of the
environment.
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Fabia anglicky 05.07
S54.5610.09.20
6Y0 012 003 LR
02_07.indd 102_07.indd 1 12.2.2007 9:50:4212.2.2007 9:50:42
… 220 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Skoda-Fabia
6
12
18
24

  • Er zit een ketting op, wij hebben een fabia combi 1.2 tsi van 2013 Geantwoord op 24-6-2021 om 12:36

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • waar zit de schakelaar vn de spiegel verwrming
    Skoda Fabia Gesteld op 7-2-2019 om 09:22

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • De knop.vokr het verstellen van de buitenspiegels kan een slag naar voren worden doorgedraaid. Dit is de ontdooi stand voor de buitenspiegels Geantwoord op 4-12-2019 om 09:58

      Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • hoe deuren van binnenin vergrendelen bij skoda fabia Gesteld op 13-9-2018 om 18:27

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Goedemorgen. Het blauwe tempratuurmeter brand bij hets starten van de auto. Deze verdwijnt weer tijdens het rijden na ongeveer 15 min. Ik heb de handleiding doorgenomen maar ik kom er niet uit. Wellicht kan iemand mij helpen. Alvast bedankt. Gesteld op 23-6-2018 om 08:44

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Hallo,in het expansie reservoir zit een voelertje als jij het koelvloeistof te lang niet verwisseld kan er drab ontstaan dat op het voelertje zit als deze vloeistof warm wordt dan verdwijnt deze of lost zich op dan werkt het voelertje weer.Dus dit KAN het probleem zijn. Geantwoord op 23-6-2018 om 10:29

      Waardeer dit antwoord (5) Misbruik melden

  • heb ik ook!!!! gaat uit als motor op temperatuur is staat in instructie boekje Geantwoord op 15-10-2018 om 18:22

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • zolang het blauwe lampje brand is uw motor nog niet op temperatuur Geantwoord op 9-4-2020 om 18:49

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Zaterdag werg ik aangehouden door een agent en wees mij erop
    dat een of meer achterlichten kapot waren. Omdat ik niet snel genoeg
    was om het probleem te verhelpen moest hij mij een bekeuring uit
    schrijven. Het probleem was dat ik niet de lamp en de daarbij behorende
    zekering niet kon vinden omdat er op de zekeringenkast geen nummer
    staat van het nummer dat bij de gebruiker van de lamp en de zekering.
    Derhalve moest ik hiervoor naar de garage en kon het probleem niet
    ter plekke op lossen. Jammer.
    Har Sleutels, 6075 Gt Herkenbosch nr. 13
    mailadres:sleuton@gmail.com
    Mijn fabia is van 2002 Gesteld op 29-4-2018 om 10:34

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Ik heb een handleiding van 2004. Wellicht kun je hier wat mee. stuur mij een mail rhe [add] hetnet.nl en ik stuur je de handleiding. Overigens gratis hoor! Geantwoord op 2-5-2018 om 11:41

      Waardeer dit antwoord (3) Misbruik melden

  • mijn stuur bekrachting is uit gevallen waar zit hij van een skoda fabia uit 2002
    Men zegt dat je hem kan vullen maar waar zit hij onder de motorkap Gesteld op 25-3-2018 om 13:16

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Wanneer moet ik de distributie riem van mijn skoda Fabia 1.2tdi greenline combi 2012 vervangen Gesteld op 24-8-2017 om 19:15

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
30

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Skoda Fabia bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Skoda Fabia in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 13,66 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Skoda Fabia

Skoda Fabia Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 212 pagina's

Skoda Fabia Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 210 pagina's

Skoda Fabia Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 209 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info